Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
KD-G240/KD-G140
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with
symbol).
For customer Use:
Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which
are located on the top or bottom of the cabinet.
Retain this information for future reference.
0807DTSMDTJEIN
Model No.
Serial No.
GET0485-001A
[J]
EN
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ESPAÑOL
ENGLISH
For safety...
Warning
INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Caution on volume setting
Temperature inside the car...
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
MAINTENANCE
How to clean the connectors
Wipe the connectors with
a cotton swab or cloth
Caution
To keep discs clean
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or
benzene.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
moistened with alcohol.
Connectors
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified
service personnel.
3. CAUTION: (For U.S.A.) Visible and/or invisible class II laser radiation when open. Do not stare into beam.
(For Canada) Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
Moisture condensation
To play new discs
Remove any rough areas from the inner and
outer edges of the disc.
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until
the moisture has evaporated.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD—8 cm (3-3/16”) disc
Warped disc
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
Unusual shape
C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)
[European Union only]
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT
PREPARATIONS
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,
etc.).
How to reset your unit
Reset the unit after installation is complete.
Detaching the control panel
Basic operations
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
play will start from where it had been stopped previously
next time you turn on the power.
• When no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot select “CD”
as the playback source.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-G240)
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for
MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other
characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,
Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level 2:
up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 64 characters; Joliet:
up to 32 characters; Windows long file name: up to 126
characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200 folders,
and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit
rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after
performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in: MP3i and MP3 PRO format, in an
inappropriate format, layer 1/2.
Tuner operations
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
Attaching the control panel
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be
automatically tuned in.
How to forcibly eject a disc
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the
use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may
not be recommended.
Basic settings
Enter PSM menu.
Cancel the display
demonstration
Set the clock
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD
(CD-DA) and MP3/WMA formats (for KD-G240).
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you cannot
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc or press
SRC to select another playback source.
Select an item.
Adjust.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this
unit:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside
the unit.
Adjust the hour.
Adjust the minute.
Deactivate the display
demonstration.
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-
protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Finish
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
1– EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General settings—PSM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Enter PSM menu.
Select an item.
Adjust.
Finish
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Indication
DEMO
Item ( : Initial) Setting
• The buttons on the unit do not work as you If you press M MODE, some buttons work differently from it
intended.
original function. Wait for 5 seconds or press M MODE again.
• DEMO ON
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is
done for about 20 seconds.
Cancels.
• This unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit.
• DEMO OFF
:
:
CLK DISP*1
• ON
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is turned
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• OFF
off.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc ejects.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds when the
power is turned off.
CLOCK H (Hour)
1 – 12
:
:
[Initial: 1 (1:00)]
[Initial: 00 (1:00)]
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used
for recording.
CLOCK M (Minute) 00 – 59
DIMMER
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc.
• Eject the disc forcibly.
SCROLL
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of
the setting.
L/O MODE
WOOFER*2
AUX ADJ
• REAR
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the speakers
(through an external amplifier).
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a subwoofer.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately
on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• WOOFER
:
• LOW
• MID
• HIGH
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
A.ADJ 00
– A.ADJ 05
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the output
level when changing the source from external component connected to the
AUX input jack on the control panel.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
TAG DISP
(for KD-G240)
AMP GAIN*3
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the tag while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
• A longer readout time is required
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
• LOW PWR
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less than
50 W to prevent the speaker from being damaged.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
have intended.
• HIGH PWR
• AREA US
:
:
AREA
When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals are set to
10 kHz/200 kHz.
When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set to 9 kHz/50 kHz
(100 kHz during auto search).
When using in South American countries. AM/FM intervals are set to 10 kHz/
100kHz.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the
tracks are recorded on the disc.
• AREA EU
• AREA SA
:
:
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a
limited number of symbols.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select “OFF” to
save the car’s battery.
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”
The volume level automatically changes to “VOL 30” if you change to “LOW PWR” while the volume level is set higher than
“VOL 30.”
2
3
*
*
SPECIFICATIONS
Audio amplifier section
Tuner section
CD player section
General
Frequency Range:
Type:
Compact disc player
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Power Output:
FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
(with channel interval set to 100 kHz or 200 kHz)
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)
AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4
≤ 1% THD+N
Signal to Noise Ratio:
Ω
and
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Installation Size (approx.):
Number of channels:
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4
Ω)
(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:
98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
4
Ω
(4
Bass:
Mid-range: 12 dB at 1 kHz
Treble: 12 dB at 7.5 kHz
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
load (full scale)
Ω
to 8
Ω
allowance)
Less than measurable limit
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
(7-3/16” × 2-1/16” × 6-5/16”)
Panel Size (approx.):
188 mm × 58 mm × 5 mm
(7-7/16” × 2-5/16” × 1/4”)
Mass (approx.):
12 dB at 60 Hz
MP3 Decoding Format (for KD-G240):
MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3
[FM Tuner]
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 35 dB
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
Frequency Response:
Ω)
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding Format
®
Line-Out Level/Impedance: 2.5 V/20 k
Output Impedance: 1 k
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
Ω
Ω)
(for KD-G240):
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
Ω
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs) (excluding accessories)
Having TROUBLE with operation?
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Please reset your unit
[AM Tuner]
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
Still having trouble??
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone
directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.
Call 1-800-252-5722 (USA ONLY)
http://www.jvc.com
PREPARATION
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,
which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s
negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
Notes:
Prepare this before installation
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently,
consult your JVC car audio dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more
than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to
8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to
prevent the speakers from being damaged (see “General settings—PSM”).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals
of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be
careful not to touch it when removing this
unit.
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and
thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
Heat sink
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
3 – EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts list for installation and connection
A
D
B
E
C
Control panel
Power cord
Sleeve
Washer (ø5)
Trim plate
G
I
J
K
F
Mounting bolt—
M4 x 5 mm (M4 x 1/4");
M5 x 15 mm (M5 x 5/8")
H
Handles
Remote controller
Battery
Lock nut (M5)
Rubber cushion
INSTALLATION
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
In dash-mounting
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
When you stand the unit,
be careful not to damage
the fuse on the rear.
Do the required electrical
connections.
Bend the appropriate tabs
to hold the sleeve firmly
in place.
When using the optional stay
When installing the unit without using the sleeve
Stay (option)
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Fire wall
* Not supplied for this unit.
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*
Dashboard
Bracket*
Screw (option)
Flat type screws
—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*
Install the unit at an angle of
less than 30˚.
Pocket
Bracket*
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Typical connections
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer
Remote lead
Y-connector *1
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR”
(See “General settings—PSM.”)
You can connect a power amplifier for
rear speakers.
To the remote lead of other equipment
or automatic antenna if any
Rear ground terminal
Line out
JVC Amplifier
Antenna
terminal
15 A fuse
Rear
speakers
Front speakers
Ignition switch
Black
To the metallic body
or chassis of the car
Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER”
(See “General settings—PSM.”)
You can also connect a subwoofer to
the REAR LINE OUT terminals.
Connect only the front speakers if your
speaker system is two-speaker system.
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
To a live terminal in the
fuse block connecting to the
car battery (bypassing the
ignition switch) (constant
12 V)
White with black stripe
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this
lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be turned on.
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis
of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint,
remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may
cause damage to the unit.
Yellow *2
3
*
*
Front speaker (left)
White
or
JVC Amplifier
Fuse block
Subwoofer
Gray with black stripe
Red
To an accessory terminal in
the fuse block
4
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Front speaker (right) Gray
Green with black stripe
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be
seriously damaged.
Blue with white
stripe
To the remote lead of other
equipment or automatic antenna if
any (200 mA max.)
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.
Rear speaker (left)
Green
Purple with black stripe
Rear speaker (right)
Purple
4 – EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
KD-G394/KD-G244
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with
symbol).
0907DTSMDTJEIN
GET0493-001A
[UI]
EN
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ESPAÑOL
ENGLISH
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
MAINTENANCE
How to clean the connectors
Wipe the connectors with
a cotton swab or cloth
To keep discs clean
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified
service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or
benzene.
moistened with alcohol.
Connectors
Moisture condensation
To play new discs
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until
the moisture has evaporated.
Remove any rough areas from the inner and
outer edges of the disc.
[European Union only]
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
For safety...
Warning
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
Unusual shape
C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)
Caution on volume setting
Temperature inside the car...
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT
PREPARATIONS
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,
etc.).
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
How to reset your unit
Reset the unit after installation is complete.
Detaching the control panel
Basic operations
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc
play will start from where it had been stopped previously
next time you turn on the power.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc (for KD-G394)
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• When no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot select “CD”
as the playback source.
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for
MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other
characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,
Windows long file name
Tuner operations
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be
automatically tuned in.
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
Attaching the control panel
How to forcibly eject a disc
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the
use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may
not be recommended.
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names Basic settings
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4
Enter PSM menu.
Cancel the display
demonstration
Set the clock
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level 2:
up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 64 characters; Joliet:
up to 32 characters; Windows long file name: up to 126
characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200 folders,
and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit
rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after
performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in: MP3i and MP3 PRO format, in an
inappropriate format, layer 1/2.
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-
protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio
CD (CD-DA) formats. KD-G394 can also play back CD-Rs/
CD-RWs in MP3/WMA formats.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you cannot
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc or press
SRC to select another playback source.
Select an item.
Adjust.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this
unit:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside
the unit.
Adjust the hour.
Adjust the minute.
Deactivate the display
demonstration.
Finish
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS
Basic operations
Remote sensor (for KD-G394)
DO NOT expose to strong light.
Check the current clock time/other information.
See also “CLK DISP“ of “General settings—PSM.”
Control panel
Remote controller—RM-RK50
RM-RK50 is supplied only for KD-G394.
• Turn on the power.
• Turn off the power [Hold].
• Attenuate the sound (if the
power is on).
7 Installing battery
Warning: To prevent accidents and damage
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent.
Lithium coin battery (CR2025)
• Store out of reach of children.
• Do not recharge, short, or dismantle.
• Do not dispose in fire.
Detach the panel.
Volume control.
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback
Select the source.
• Do not carry around with other metallic materials.
source if there is no disc in the unit.
7 Features
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
Display window
• Selects the sound mode
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
Playback mode / item indicator
: For KD-G394
Disc indicator
• MO: Lights up in monaural mode.
• ST: Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
attenuates the sound when power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
•
• Selects the source.
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folders of MP3/WMA discs.
KD-G394: Disc information indicators
Tr (track) indicator
LOUD (loudness) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held.
• Source display
• Track number
• KD-G394: Folder number
(for MP3/WMA discs)
• Volume level indicator
• Time countdown indicator
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.
• Adjusts the volume level.
Main display (time,
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
playback information) indicator
Disc operations
Radio operations
Eject disc.
• Press SRC to
listen to another
playback source.
Select preset station.
• You can also use 5 / ∞
to select preset station.
• 4 / ¢
[Press] Select track (for CD) or folder* (for MP3/
WMA) number (01 – 06).
[Hold] Select track (for CD) or folder* (for MP3/
WMA) number (07 – 12).
* KD-G394: Folders are required to assigned with
2-digit numbers at the beginning.
Select “FM/AM.”
[Press] Go to the next or previous track.
[Hold] Fast-forwards or reverses the track.
• 5 / ∞ : KD-G394: Go to the next or previous
folder (for MP3/WMA discs).
Select the bands.
Search for a station—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
Turn on the power.
Insert disc.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.
• MO indicator lights up.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure.
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)
You can preset six stations for each band.
Selecting the playback modes
After pressing M MODE, press the following buttons to...
Changing the display information
TRK RPT : Plays the current track
repeatedly.
FLDR RPT* : Plays all tracks of the current
folder repeatedly.
While playing an audio While playing an MP3 or
CD or CD Text a WMA disc (for KD-G394)
Manual presetting
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.
RPT OFF : Cancels.
FLDR RND*: Plays all tracks of the current
folder, then the tracks of the
next folder at random.
ALL RND : Plays all tracks of the current
disc at random.
RND OFF : Cancels.
* KD-G394: Only for MP3/WMA.
: Clock with the current track number
: The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
External component operations
You can connect an external component to the
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
Skipping a track quickly during play
• KD-G394: For MP3/WMA disc, you can skip a track
within the same folder.
Turn on the connected
component and start
playing the source.
1
2
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have tags or “TAG DISP” is
set to “TAG OFF,” folder name and file name appear.
Example: Select track 32
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
To avoid the sudden increase of the output level when
changing the source, adjust the auxiliary input level (AUX ADJ)
accordingly.
Stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
(See “AUX ADJ” of “General settings—PSM.”)
Portable audio player, etc.
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
SETTINGS
LOUD*3 (loudness) : Boost low and high frequencies to LOUD ON or
produce a well-balanced sound at LOUD OFF
a low volume level.
Sound adjustments
Adjusting the sound
VOL (volume)
: Adjust the volume.
00 to 50
(or 00 to 30)*4
Preset values
BAS
LOUD
(loudness)
MID
TRE
1
(bass) (mid-range) (treble)
Indication (For)
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the adjustment you have made
is stored for the currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be applied to all sound modes
(iEQ).
BAS*1 (bass)
MID*1
:
:
Adjust the bass.
–06 to +06
USER (Flat sound)
00
00
00
00
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2
3
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound –06 to +06
level.
*
*
ROCK (Rock or disco music)
CLASSIC (Classical music)
POPS (Light music)
+03
+01
+02
+04
+03
+02
+03
+02
+01
+03
(mid-range)
00
TRE*1 (treble)
FAD*2 (fader)
BAL (balance)
:
:
:
Adjust the treble.
–06 to +06
4
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting.
+01
–02
00
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance. R06 to F06
Adjust the left and right speaker balance. L06 to R06
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)
JAZZ (Jazz music)
See reverse page \
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General settings—PSM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Enter PSM menu.
Select an item.
Adjust.
Finish
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Indication
DEMO
Item ( : Initial) Setting
• This unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit.
• DEMO ON
• DEMO OFF
:
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is
done for about 20 seconds.
Cancels.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc ejects.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
CLK DISP*1
• ON
:
:
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is turned
off.
• OFF
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds when the
power is turned off.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used
for recording.
CLOCK H (Hour)
1 – 12
:
:
[Initial: 1 (1:00)]
[Initial: 00 (1:00)]
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc.
• Eject the disc forcibly.
CLOCK M (Minute) 00 – 59
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
DIMMER
SCROLL
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately
on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of
the setting.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
AUX ADJ
A.ADJ 00
– A.ADJ 05
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the output
level when changing the source from external component connected to the
AUX input jack on the control panel.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
TAG DISP
(for KD-G394)
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the tag while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
have intended.
AMP GAIN*2
• LOW PWR
• HIGH PWR
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less than
50 W to prevent the speaker from being damaged.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the
tracks are recorded on the disc.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select “OFF” to
save the car’s battery.
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a
limited number of symbols.
2
*
The volume level automatically changes to “VOL 30” if you change to “LOW PWR” while the volume level is set higher than
“VOL 30.”
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
SPECIFICATIONS
Audio amplifier section
Tuner section
CD player section
General
Maximum Power Output:
Frequency Range:
Type:
Compact disc player
Power Requirement:
Front/Rear:
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
50 W per channel
FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)
Grounding System:
Negative ground
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz
to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%
total harmonic distortion.
Number of channels:
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:
KD-G394: MP3 Decoding Format (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3):
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
KD-G394: WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
Allowable Operating Temperature: 0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Installation Size (approx.):
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
Panel Size (approx.):
[FM Tuner]
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 30 dB
Ω
)
98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range: Bass:
4
Ω
(4
Ω
to 8
Ω
allowance)
12 dB at 60 Hz
Mid-range: 12 dB at 1 kHz
Treble: 12 dB at 7.5 kHz
Ω)
Less than measurable limit
188 mm × 58 mm × 5 mm
Mass (approx.):
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
KD-G394: Line-Out Level/Impedance:
2.5 V/20 k
KD-G394: Output Impedance: 1 k
Other Terminal: AUX (auxiliary) input jack
®
Format:
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
[AM Tuner]
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Ω
load (full scale)
Ω
PREPARATION
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,
which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s
negative terminal and make all electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
Notes:
Prepare this before installation
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently,
consult your JVC car audio dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more
than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to
8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to
prevent the speakers from being damaged (see “General settings—PSM”).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals
of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be
careful not to touch it when removing this
unit.
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and
thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• This unit does not work at all.
Heat sink
* Have you reset your unit?
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts list for installation and connection
A/B
C
D
E
F
Hard case (for
KD-G394)/
Control panel
Sleeve
Trim plate
Power cord
Washer (ø5)
For KD-G394
H
J
K
L
G
Mounting bolt
(M4 × 5 mm;
M5 × 15 mm)
I
Handles
Remote controller
Battery
Lock nut (M5)
Rubber cushion
INSTALLATION
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
In dash-mounting
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
When you stand the unit,
be careful not to damage
the fuse on the rear.
Do the required electrical
connections.
For KD-G394
Bend the appropriate tabs
to hold the sleeve firmly
in place.
When using the optional stay
When installing the unit without using the sleeve
Stay (option)
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Fire wall
* Not supplied for this unit.
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*
Dashboard
Bracket*
Screw (option)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*
Install the unit at an angle of
less than 30˚.
Pocket
Bracket*
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Typical connections
Connecting the external amplifier (for KD-G394)
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Remote lead
Y-connector *1
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Rear ground terminal
Line out (only for KD-G394)
To the remote lead of other equipment
or automatic antenna if any
Antenna
terminal
15 A fuse
Rear
speakers
JVC Amplifier
Ignition switch
Black
To the metallic body
or chassis of the car
Connect only the front speakers if your
speaker system is two-speaker system.
Signal cord *1
Front speakers
To a live terminal in the
fuse block connecting to
the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch)
White with black stripe
Yellow *2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be
turned on.
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated
with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.
Front speaker (left)
White
(constant 12 V)
3
Fuse block
*
Gray with black stripe
Red
To an accessory terminal in
the fuse block
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
Front speaker (right) Gray
Green with black stripe
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit will be
seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.
Blue
To the automatic antenna if any
(250 mA max.)
Rear speaker (left)
Green
Blue with white
stripe
Purple with black stripe
To the remote lead of other equipment
(200 mA max.)—only for KD-G394
Rear speaker (right)
Purple
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD RECEIVER
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0486-001A
[U/UH]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
How to reset your unit
[European Union only]
Warning:
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved
in a traffic accident.
How to forcibly eject a disc
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
The control panel illustrations used for explanation in this manual is of KD-G395/KD-G245.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
How to use the M MODE button
CONTENTS
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons will work
as different function buttons.
Control panel —
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245..................
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as
MO (monaural) button.
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........
Getting started................................
Basic operations...................................................
6
6
Radio operations .............................
7
Disc operations................................
8
To use these buttons for their original functions
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds
without pressing any of these buttons until the
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................
8
Sound adjustments.......................... 10
Other external component
operations ................................... 11
General settings — PSM .................. 11
Maintenance ................................... 13
More about this unit ........................ 14
Troubleshooting.............................. 16
Specifications.................................. 17
Detaching the control panel
For safety...
Attaching the control panel
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Control panel —
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245
Parts identification
Display window
1 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons
2 0 (eject) button
;
a
s
RND (random) button
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
KD-G396/KD-G395: Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
DISC indicator
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), KD-G396/KD-G395:
RPT (repeat)
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),
ST (stereo)
LOUD (loudness) indicator
3
(standby/on attenuator) button
4
KD-G396/KD-G395: Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
Loading slot
Display window
EQ (equalizer) button
DISP (display) button
(control panel release) button
SRC (source) button
d
f
5
6
7
8
9
p
(folder),
g
h
j
k
l
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Tr (track) indicator
q 4 / ¢ buttons
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
Control dial
BAND button
SEL (select) button
M MODE button
MO (monaural) button
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button
Number buttons
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Volume level indicator / Time countdown indicator
Main display
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,
USER
/
z
RPT (repeat) button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Main elements and features
Remote controller —
RM-RK50
RM-RK50 is supplied only for KD-G396/KD-G395.
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle
in between.
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.
VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
SOUND button
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent
equalizer).
SOURCE button
Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may
explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,
cracking, or starting a fire:
3
4
5
• Selects the source.
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Basic settings
Getting started
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and
12.
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2 Setting the clock
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if
there is no disc in the unit.
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
! For FM/AM tuner
3
Finish the procedure.
⁄ Adjust the volume.
To check the current clock time while the
power is turned off
Volume level appears.
Clock time is shown on the display for
about 5 seconds. See also page 12.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 10.)
To drop the volume in a
moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press the
button again.
To turn off the power
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Storing stations in memory
Radio operations
You can preset six stations for each band.
~
Ÿ
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to
store into.
2
3
! Start searching for a station.
When a station is received,
searching stops.
To stop searching, press the
same button again.
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic
presetting is over.
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
1
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
2
Select a desired station frequency.
1
2
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
3
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.
Preset number flashes for a while.
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator
goes off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous track
Listening to a preset station
1
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.
or
To go to the next or previous folder (for MP3/
WMA discs in KD-G396/KD-G395)
To check the other information while
listening to an FM or AM station
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
(for MP3/WMA discs in KD-G396/KD-G395)
directly
Clock Ô Frequency
To select a number from 01 – 06:
Disc operations
Playing a disc in the unit
To select a number from 07 – 12:
~ Turn on the power.
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—
01, 02, 03, and so on.
Ÿ
To select a particular track in a folder
(for MP3/WMA disc):
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
change the source or eject the disc.
To stop play and eject the disc
• Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track
(for KD-G396/KD-G395)
Other main functions
Skipping tracks quickly during play
• KD-G396/KD-G395: For MP3 or WMA discs, you can
skip tracks within the same folder
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose
number is a single digit (1 to 9)
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”
(see page 12)
A = Album name/performer (folder
name*2) [
name*2) [
beginning)
] = Track title (file
] = B = (back to the
1
2
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”
A = Folder name [ ] = File name
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10
tracks.
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number
The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
• After the last track, the first track will be selected
and vice versa.
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display
3
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the
TAG indicator will not light up.
2
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
2
Select your desired playback mode.
Repeat play
Changing the display information
7
Mode
Plays repeatedly
TRK RPT
FLDR RPT *
:
:
The current track. [
All tracks of the current folder.
]
While playing an audio CD or CD Text
[
]
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)
RPT OFF
:
Cancels.
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
7
Random play
Adjusting the sound
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference.
Mode Plays at random
FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,
then the tracks of the next folder
1
2
and so on. [
]
ALL RND
RND OFF
:
:
All tracks of the current disc.
[
]
Cancels.
* KD-G396/KD-G395: Only while playing an MP3 or
a WMA disc.
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the
display
Indication, [Range]
BAS *1 (bass), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the bass.
Sound adjustments
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
MID *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
TRE *1 (treble), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the treble.
FAD *2 (fader), [R06 to F06]
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
Preset values
BAS MIDTRE LOUD
Indication (For)
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
USER
(Flat sound)
LOUD *3 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.
00
00
00
OFF
ROCK
(Rock or disco music)
+03 00 +02 OFF
+01 00 +03 OFF
+02 +01 +02 OFF
+04 –02 +01 OFF
+03 00 +03 OFF
VOL (volume), [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *4
Adjust the volume.
CLASSIC
(Classical music)
POPS
(Light music)
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader
level to “00.”
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be
applied to all sound modes.
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See
page 12 for details.)
HIP HOP
(Funk or rap music)
2
3
4
*
*
*
JAZZ
(Jazz music)
BAS: Bass; MID: Mid-range; TRE: Treble; LOUD: Loudness
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Other external component
operations
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items
listed in the table on page 12.
You can connect an external component to the
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
1
2
3
Select a PSM item.
Portable audio player, etc
Adjust the PSM item selected.
Stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
~
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM
items if necessary.
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and
start playing the source.
! Adjust the volume.
Finish the procedure.
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 10.)
To check the other information while
listening to an external component
Clock Ô AUX IN
Continued on the next page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Indications
Item
Selectable settings, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
DEMO
Display demonstration
• DEMO ON
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].
Cancels.
• DEMO OFF
• ON
:
:
CLK DISP *1
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power
Clock display
is turned off.
• OFF
: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds
when the power is turned off, [6].
CLOCK H
Hour adjustment
1 – 12
00 – 59
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]
CLOCK M
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]
Minute adjustment
DIMMER
Dimmer
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL *2
Scroll
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
AUX ADJ
Auxiliary input level
adjustment
A.ADJ 00
– A.ADJ 05
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source from external component
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
TAG DISP *3
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
Amplifier gain control
• LOW PWR
• HIGH PWR
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker
is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF”
that you save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
For KD-G396/KD-G395.
2
3
*
*
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
To keep discs clean
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Connectors
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
Sticker and
sticker residue
Stick-on label
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
Center holder
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
• KD-G396/KD-G395: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are
recorded in “folders.”
• KD-G396/KD-G395: While fast-forwarding or
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear
intermittent sounds.
More about this unit
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• KD-G396/KD-G395 can only play back files of the
same type as those which are detected first if a disc
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA
files.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,
disc play will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for
the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will
be automatically tuned in.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) formats. KD-G396/
KD-G395 can also play back CD-Rs/CD-RWs in MP3/
WMA formats.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
KD-G396/KD-G395: Playing an MP3/WMA
disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Changing the source
• If you change the source, playback also stops
(without ejecting the disc).
Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,
disc play starts from where it has been stopped
previously.
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 64 characters
General settings—PSM
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
– Joliet: up to 32 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 126 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Store stations manually.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
•
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you
used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on
the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file
names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks are not played back in the order you
have intended.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),
album name). numbers, and a limited number of symbols.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
CD PLAYER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Type:
Compact disc player
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Signal Detection
System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Dynamic Range:
93 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
For KD-G396/KD-G395:
12 dB at 60 Hz
12 dB at 1 kHz
12 dB at 7.5 kHz
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
Mid-range:
Treble:
Max. Bit Rate:
320 kbps
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
For KD-G396/KD-G395:
Max. Bit Rate:
192 kbps
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Line-Out Level/
Impedance:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Other Terminal:
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C
Temperature:
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Installation Size:
Panel Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
AM:
188 mm × 58 mm × 5 mm
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
Mass:
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
50 dB Quieting
Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel
65 dB
Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
30 dB
AM Tuner
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
EN, TH
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0807DTSMDTJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245
Installation/Connection Manual
°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß
0807DTSMDTJEIN
EN, TH
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0486-006A
[U/UH]
ENGLISH
‰∑¬
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
™¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰¥√∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æÕ„™ß“π°∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øø“ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑ À“°√∂¬πµ¢Õß§≥‰¡‰
¥„™√–∫∫π µÕß„™‡§√Õß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™«¬ ´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥®“°√“π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
§”‡µÕπ
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
‡æÕªÕß°π°“√‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„Àª≈¥¢«·∫µ‡µÕ√≈∫ÕÕ°·≈«®ßµÕ “¬‰ø°Õπµ¥µß‡§√Õß
• µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π “¬¥πµÕ√–À«“߇§√Õß°∫µ«∂ß √∂¬πµ„À¡·≈«À≈ß®“°µ¥µß
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
À¡“¬‡Àµ:
Notes:
• „™æ°¥®”‡æ“–·∑πø« À“°ø« ¢“¥∫Õ¬ „Àª√°…“√“ π¢“¬‡§√Õ߇ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 12 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
• ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀµÕ≈”‚æß ∑¡°”≈ߢ∫ ß ¥‡°π°«“ 50 W (∑ߥ“πÀπ“·≈–¥“πÀ≈ß ¡§“§«“¡µ“π∑“π 4 Ω ∂ß 8 Ω)
∂“°”≈ߢ∫µ”°«“ 50 W „À‡ª≈¬π§“ “AMP GAIN” ‡æÕªÕß°π‰¡„À≈”‚æß™”√¥ (¥
• °“√ªÕß°π°“√≈¥«ß®√ ®–µÕßæπ¢« “¬µ–°« ∑‰¡„™·≈«¥«¬‡∑ ªæπ “¬‰ø
• ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ®–√Õπ¡“°À≈ß®“°„™ √–¡¥√–«ßÕ¬“‰ª ¡º ‡¡Õ∂Õ¥™¥ª√–°Õ∫π
Ÿ
À“π12 §”·π–π”)
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Heat sink / ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
¢Õ§«√√–«ß ”À√∫°“√µÕ·À≈ß®“¬°”≈ß·≈–≈”‚æß:
•
Õ¬“µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æß‡¢“°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ ¡©–π𠙥ª√–°Õ∫®–‰¥√∫§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬¡“°
• °Õπ∑®–µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ߢÕß≈”‚æß‡¢“°∫≈”‚æß „Àµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õß§≥„À‡√¬∫√Õ¬‡ ¬°Õπ
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
√“¬°“√ «πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√∫µ¥µß·≈–‡™Õ¡µÕ°π
«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ„À¡“°∫™¥ª√–°Õ∫π À“°¡ ß„¥‰¡§√∫ °√≥“ª√°…“µ«·∑π®”À𓬇§√Õ߇ ¬ßµ¥√∂¬πµ JVC ‚¥¬∑π∑
A / B
C
D
Hard case (for KD-G396/KD-G395)/Control panel
Sleeve
Trim plate
≈ß∫√√® ( ”À√∫ KD-G396 À√Õ KD-G395)/À𓪥
ª≈Õ°À¡
·ºπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µß
E
F
G
H
Power cord
“¬‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß
Washer (ø5)
ª√–‡°π«ß·À«π (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
πÕµ≈Õ§ (M5)
Mounting bolt
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)
≈°µ¥
(M4 × 5 ¡¡.; M5 × 15 ¡¡.)
For KD-G396/KD-G395 / ”À√∫ KD-G396 À√Õ KD-G395
I
J
K
L
Rubber cushion
¬“ß°π°√–·∑°
Handles
§π∫ß§∫
Remote controller
√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈
Battery
·∫µ‡µÕ√
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
°“√µ¥µß
(
°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπ“ª
í
)
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
¿“浫լ“ßµÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß∂ß°“√µ¥µß·∫∫∑«‰ª À“°§≥¡ª≠À“À√ÕµÕß°“√¢Õ¡≈‡°¬«°∫™¥µ¥µß °√≥“ª√°…“°∫º¢“¬‡§√Õ߇
¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC ¢Õß∑“πÀ√Õ∫√…
• ™¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂“§≥‰¡·π„®«“µ¥µß™¥ª√–°Õ∫π∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡ „ÀÀ“™“ߺ‡™¬«™“≠‡ªπºµ¥µß
Do the required electrical connections.
µÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑°”À𥉫∑ßÀ¡¥
For KD-G396/KD-G395 /
”À√∫ KD-G396 À√Õ KD-G395
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
ßÕ·ºπ‡æÕ¬¥ª≈Õ°„ÀµÕ°π‡¢“∑
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
°“√∂Õ¥™¥ª√–°Õ∫
°Õπ®–∂Õ¥™¥ª√–°Õ∫ „Àª≈¥Àπ“µ¥ «π∑“¬°Õπ
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
„ §π∫ß§∫2 Õπ≈ß„π√Õß ”À√∫„™æπ≈«¥¥ß¿“殓°ππ
„À‡≈Õ𙥪√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°„π¢≥–∑§Õ¬Ê¥ß§π∫ß§∫∑ß Õß
ÕπÕÕ°®“°°π
When using the optional stay / ‡¡Õ„™µ«¬¥·∫∫‡≈Õ°‰¥
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡Õµ¥µß™¥ª√–°Õ∫‚¥¬‰¡„™ª≈Õ°À¡
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
µ«Õ¬“߇™π „π√∂¬πµ‚µ‚¬µ“ „À∂Õ¥«∑¬µ¥√∂¬πµÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈«®ßµ¥µß‡§√Õßπ‡¢“·∑π∑
Stay (option)
µ«¬¥ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)
Fire wall
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2
ºπß°π‰ø
Dashboard
·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡
Bracket*2
·∑π√Õß√∫*2
Screw (option)
°√ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*2
Pocket
°–‡ª“–
Bracket*2
·∑π√Õß√∫*2
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
µ¥µß™¥ª√–°Õ∫∑¡¡µ”°«“ 30˚ Õß»“
À¡“¬‡Àµ
:
‡¡Õµ¥µß™¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑π√Õß√∫‰« „À„™ °√¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂“„™ °√¬“«°«“πÕ“®∑”„À™¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ¬À“¬‰¥
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*1 ‡¡Õ§≥µß™¥ª√–°Õ∫¢π √–«ßÕ¬“∑”„Àø« ∫√‡«≥ «π∑“¬‡ ¬À“¬
*2 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™¥ª√–°Õ∫π
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
ENGLISH
‰∑¬
°“√‡™Õ¡‚¥¬„™‰øø“
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A
Typical connections / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫ª°µ
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
°Õ•∑”°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÕ¬“ß•–¡¥•–«Õ¬“„Àº¥æ•“¥„•°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ™
ÿ
ÿ
•
°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕº¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥§«“¡‡†¬À“¬•“¬·•ß°•™ÿ¥ª•–
°Õ••‰¥“•µ–°«¢Õ߆“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕ
ÿ
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
1 µÕ “¬‰ø µ“¡≈”¥∫∑√–∫
2 ‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫“¬Õ“°“»
ÿ
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3
ÿ¥∑“¬ µÕ «π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø‡¢“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π
Line out (see diagram ) — only for KD-G396/KD-G395
“¬ÕÕ° (¥·ºπ¿¡ ) — ”À√∫ KD-G396 À√Õ KD-G395 ‡∑“ππ
Rear ground terminal
®ÿ¥‡™Õ¡µÕ “¬¥π¥“πÀ≈ß
Antenna terminal
15 A fuse
ø« ¢π“¥ 15 A
¢« “¬Õ“°“»
Ignition switch
«∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥
Black
¥”
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
µÕ°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ‡™ ´ ¢Õß√∂¬πµ
Yellow *2
‡À≈Õß *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
µÕ°∫¢«∑¡°√–· ‰øø“„π·ºßø« ´ßµÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ
( ‚¥¬‰¡µÕß„™ «∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥) (12 ‚«≈∑§ß∑)
Fuse block
·ºßø«
Red
ᴧ
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
µÕ°∫¢« «πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø«
Blue
»ø“
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
‡ “Õ“°“»‰øø“Õµ‚π¡µ À“°¡ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.) — only for KD-G396/KD-G395
µÕ‡¢“°∫Õª°√≥Õπ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 200 mA) — ”À√∫ KD-G396 À√Õ KD-G395 ‡∑“ππ
White with black stripe
Gray with black stripe
Gray
Green with black stripe
Green
Purple with black stripe
Purple
White
¢“«·∂∫¥”
‡∑“·∂∫¥”
‡∑“
‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”
‡¢¬«
¡«ß·∂∫¥”
¡«ß
¢“«
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
Left speaker (front)
≈”‚æß¢«“ (Àπ“)
≈”‚æß´“¬ (À≈ß)
≈”‚æß¢«“ (À≈ß)
≈”‚æß´“¬ (Àπ“)
1
2
*1 ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*2 °Õπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™
ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π°Õπ∑®–µ¥µß µÕßµÕ “¬µ–°«π°Õπ
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power
cannot be turned on.
¡©–ππ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Connecting the external amplifier (only for KD-G396/KD-G395) / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß¿“¬πÕ° ( ”À√∫ KD-G396 À√Õ KD-G395 ‡∑“ππ)
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
§ÿ≥ “¡“√∂µÕ°∫·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√ ‡æÕ‡æ¡§ÿ≥ ¿“æ‡ ¬ß„À°∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‚Õ¢Õß√∂¬πµ
• µÕ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈ ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢“°∫ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥Õπ Ê ‡æÕ®– “¡“√∂§«∫§ÿ¡‚¥¬™ÿ¥ª√–
°Õ∫π‰¥
• ∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™
ÿ
¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰«
Remote lead
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•
¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
µÕ “¬°∫Õÿª°√≥ÕπÀ√Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õµ‚π¡µ∂“¡
Rear speakers
JVC Amplifier
‡§√Õߢ¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC
≈”‚æßÀ≈ß
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
“¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ ( ‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)
Front speakers
≈”‚æßÀπ“
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to
the unit.
*
µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂߇À≈° À√Õµ«∂ß√∂
—µ√ß «π ∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈Õ∫ (À“°¡ ‡§≈Õ∫Õ¬ „À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ °ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π)
À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”𠇧√ÕßÕ“®™”√¥À√Õ‡ ¬À“¬‰¥
ÿ
°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª≠À“¢¥¢Õß
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
• ø« ¢“¥
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ¥”·≈– ·¥ßÕ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡
• Power cannot be turned on.
• ‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õ߉¥
* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ‡À≈ÕßÀ√Õ‰¡
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• ‰¡¡‡ ¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æß‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√À√Õ‰¡
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• ‡ ¬ß‡æ¬π
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æß¥“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• ‡ ¬ß√∫°«π
* ¡°“√„™ “¬ πÊ À√ÕÀπ“Ê µÕ®“°‡§√Õß «π∑µ¥µß ‰«∫πæπ¥“πÀ≈ß°∫µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÀ√Õ‰¡
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√Õπ¢π
* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ߥπÀ√Õ‰¡
* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æß¥“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡
• ‡§√Õß√∫π∑”ß“π‰¡
* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡·≈«À√Õ¬ß
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
CD RECEIVER
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245
ALAT PENERIMA CD
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.
Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 6.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.
INSTRUCTIONS
BUKU PETUNJUK
GET0486-004A
[UN]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
How to reset your unit
[European Union only]
Warning:
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved
in a traffic accident.
How to forcibly eject a disc
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
The control panel illustrations used for explanation in this manual is of KD-G395/KD-G245.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to use the M MODE button
CONTENTS
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons will work
as different function buttons.
Control panel —
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245..................
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as
MO (monaural) button.
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........
Getting started................................
Basic operations...................................................
6
6
Radio operations .............................
7
Disc operations................................
8
To use these buttons for their original functions
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds
without pressing any of these buttons until the
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................
8
Sound adjustments.......................... 10
Other external component
operations ................................... 11
General settings — PSM .................. 11
Maintenance ................................... 13
More about this unit ........................ 14
Troubleshooting.............................. 16
Specifications.................................. 17
Detaching the control panel
For safety...
Attaching the control panel
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel —
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245
Parts identification
Display window
1 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons
2 0 (eject) button
;
a
s
RND (random) button
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
KD-G396/KD-G395: Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
DISC indicator
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), KD-G396/KD-G395:
RPT (repeat)
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),
ST (stereo)
LOUD (loudness) indicator
3
(standby/on attenuator) button
4
KD-G396/KD-G395: Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
Loading slot
Display window
EQ (equalizer) button
DISP (display) button
(control panel release) button
SRC (source) button
d
f
5
6
7
8
9
p
(folder),
g
h
j
k
l
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Tr (track) indicator
q 4 / ¢ buttons
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
Control dial
BAND button
SEL (select) button
M MODE button
MO (monaural) button
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button
Number buttons
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Volume level indicator / Time countdown indicator
Main display
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,
USER
/
z
RPT (repeat) button
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main elements and features
Remote controller —
RM-RK50
RM-RK50 is supplied only for KD-G396/KD-G395.
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle
in between.
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.
VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
SOUND button
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent
equalizer).
SOURCE button
Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may
explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,
cracking, or starting a fire:
3
4
5
• Selects the source.
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic settings
Getting started
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and
12.
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2 Setting the clock
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if
there is no disc in the unit.
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
! For FM/AM tuner
3
Finish the procedure.
⁄ Adjust the volume.
To check the current clock time while the
power is turned off
Volume level appears.
Clock time is shown on the display for
about 5 seconds. See also page 12.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 10.)
To drop the volume in a
moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press the
button again.
To turn off the power
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing stations in memory
Radio operations
You can preset six stations for each band.
~
Ÿ
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to
store into.
2
3
! Start searching for a station.
When a station is received,
searching stops.
To stop searching, press the
same button again.
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic
presetting is over.
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
1
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
2
Select a desired station frequency.
1
2
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
3
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.
Preset number flashes for a while.
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator
goes off.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous track
Listening to a preset station
1
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.
or
To go to the next or previous folder (for MP3/
WMA discs in KD-G396/KD-G395)
To check the other information while
listening to an FM or AM station
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
(for MP3/WMA discs in KD-G396/KD-G395)
directly
Clock Ô Frequency
To select a number from 01 – 06:
Disc operations
Playing a disc in the unit
To select a number from 07 – 12:
~ Turn on the power.
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—
01, 02, 03, and so on.
Ÿ
To select a particular track in a folder
(for MP3/WMA disc):
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
change the source or eject the disc.
To stop play and eject the disc
• Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track
(for KD-G396/KD-G395)
Other main functions
Skipping tracks quickly during play
• KD-G396/KD-G395: For MP3 or WMA discs, you can
skip tracks within the same folder
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose
number is a single digit (1 to 9)
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”
(see page 12)
A = Album name/performer (folder
name*2) [
name*2) [
beginning)
] = Track title (file
] = B = (back to the
1
2
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”
A = Folder name [ ] = File name
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10
tracks.
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number
The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
• After the last track, the first track will be selected
and vice versa.
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display
3
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the
TAG indicator will not light up.
2
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
2
Select your desired playback mode.
Repeat play
Changing the display information
7
Mode
Plays repeatedly
TRK RPT
FLDR RPT *
:
:
The current track. [
All tracks of the current folder.
]
While playing an audio CD or CD Text
[
]
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)
RPT OFF
:
Cancels.
Continued on the next page
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Random play
Adjusting the sound
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference.
Mode Plays at random
FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,
then the tracks of the next folder
1
2
and so on. [
]
ALL RND
RND OFF
:
:
All tracks of the current disc.
[
]
Cancels.
* KD-G396/KD-G395: Only while playing an MP3 or
a WMA disc.
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the
display
Indication, [Range]
BAS *1 (bass), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the bass.
Sound adjustments
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
MID *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
TRE *1 (treble), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the treble.
FAD *2 (fader), [R06 to F06]
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
Preset values
BAS MIDTRE LOUD
Indication (For)
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
USER
(Flat sound)
LOUD *3 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.
00
00
00
OFF
ROCK
(Rock or disco music)
+03 00 +02 OFF
+01 00 +03 OFF
+02 +01 +02 OFF
+04 –02 +01 OFF
+03 00 +03 OFF
VOL (volume), [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *4
Adjust the volume.
CLASSIC
(Classical music)
POPS
(Light music)
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader
level to “00.”
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be
applied to all sound modes.
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See
page 12 for details.)
HIP HOP
(Funk or rap music)
2
3
4
*
*
*
JAZZ
(Jazz music)
BAS: Bass; MID: Mid-range; TRE: Treble; LOUD: Loudness
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other external component
operations
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items
listed in the table on page 12.
You can connect an external component to the
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
1
2
3
Select a PSM item.
Portable audio player, etc
Adjust the PSM item selected.
Stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
~
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM
items if necessary.
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and
start playing the source.
! Adjust the volume.
Finish the procedure.
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 10.)
To check the other information while
listening to an external component
Clock Ô AUX IN
Continued on the next page
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indications
Item
Selectable settings, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
DEMO
Display demonstration
• DEMO ON
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].
Cancels.
• DEMO OFF
• ON
:
:
CLK DISP *1
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power
Clock display
is turned off.
• OFF
: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds
when the power is turned off, [6].
CLOCK H
Hour adjustment
1 – 12
00 – 59
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]
CLOCK M
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]
Minute adjustment
DIMMER
Dimmer
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL *2
Scroll
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
AUX ADJ
Auxiliary input level
adjustment
A.ADJ 00
– A.ADJ 05
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source from external component
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
TAG DISP *3
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
Amplifier gain control
• LOW PWR
• HIGH PWR
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker
is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF”
that you save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
For KD-G396/KD-G395.
2
3
*
*
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To keep discs clean
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Connectors
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
Sticker and
sticker residue
Stick-on label
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
Center holder
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• KD-G396/KD-G395: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are
recorded in “folders.”
• KD-G396/KD-G395: While fast-forwarding or
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear
intermittent sounds.
More about this unit
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• KD-G396/KD-G395 can only play back files of the
same type as those which are detected first if a disc
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA
files.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,
disc play will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for
the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will
be automatically tuned in.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) formats. KD-G396/
KD-G395 can also play back CD-Rs/CD-RWs in MP3/
WMA formats.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
KD-G396/KD-G395: Playing an MP3/WMA
disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Changing the source
• If you change the source, playback also stops
(without ejecting the disc).
Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,
disc play starts from where it has been stopped
previously.
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 64 characters
General settings—PSM
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
– Joliet: up to 32 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 126 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Store stations manually.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
•
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you
used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on
the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file
names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks are not played back in the order you
have intended.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),
album name). numbers, and a limited number of symbols.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
CD PLAYER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Type:
Compact disc player
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Signal Detection
System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Dynamic Range:
93 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
For KD-G396/KD-G395:
12 dB at 60 Hz
12 dB at 1 kHz
12 dB at 7.5 kHz
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
Mid-range:
Treble:
Max. Bit Rate:
320 kbps
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
For KD-G396/KD-G395:
Max. Bit Rate:
192 kbps
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Line-Out Level/
Impedance:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Other Terminal:
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C
Temperature:
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Installation Size:
Panel Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
AM:
188 mm × 58 mm × 5 mm
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
Mass:
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
50 dB Quieting
Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel
65 dB
Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
30 dB
AM Tuner
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Ada MASALAH dengan cara
pengoperasian?
Setel kembali unit Anda
Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda
EN, IN
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0807DTSMDTJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245
Installation/Connection Manual
Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan
0807DTSMDTJEIN
EN, IN
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0486-009A
[UN]
ENGLISH
INDONESIA
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does Alat penerima ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
kendaraan anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli
di penyalur-penyalur audio mobil JVC.
WARNINGS
PERINGATAN
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif
electrical connections before installing the unit.
baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang alat penerima.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan alat penerima ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.
Notes:
Catatan:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio • Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering putus, konsultasikan pada
dealer.
penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 12 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
• Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya
di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω). Jika maksimum power kurang
dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker
dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 12 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan
pita isolasi.
• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika
memindahkan alat penerima ini.
Heat sink / Pendingin
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan
sambungan-sambungan speaker:
• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,
alat penerima tersebut akan secara serius rusak.
• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan
speaker dalam mobil anda.
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection
Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk alat penerima ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi
dealer audio mobil JVC anda.
A / B
C
D
Hard case (for KD-G396/KD-G395)/Control panel
Sleeve
Trim plate
Kotak keras (untuk KD-G396/KD-G395)/Panel kontrol
Selongsong
Plat rapi
E
F
G
H
Power cord
Kabel power
Washer (ø5)
Perapat sambungan (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Mur kunci (M5)
Mounting bolt
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)
Baut bingkai
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)
For KD-G396/KD-G395 / Untuk KD-G396/KD-G395
I
J
K
L
Rubber cushion
Bantalan karet
Handles
Pegangan-pegangan
Remote controller
Pengontrol jauh
Battery
Baterai
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)
Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau
informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC
atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.
• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang alat penerima ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan
teknisi yang berkualitas.
Do the required electrical connections.
Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan listrik yang
diperlukan.
For KD-G396/KD-G395 /
Untuk KD-G396/KD-G395
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat
untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat
pada tempatnya.
Removing the unit
Memindahkan alat penerima
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Sebelum memindahkan alat penerima, lepaskan seksi belakang.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang
seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga alat penerima
dapat dipindahkan.
When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan
penguat tambahan
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang alat penerima
tanpa menggunakan selongsong
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang alat penerima tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.
Stay (option)
Penguat (tambahan)
Fire wall
Dinding tahan api
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
Tempat alat pada
bagian depan
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Screw (option)
Sekrup (tambahan)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
Kantong
Bracket*2
Breket*2
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are
used, they could damage the unit.
: Ketika memasang alat penerima pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–
8 mm. Jika sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak alat penerima.
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut kurang
dari 30˚.
Catatan
1
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Ketika anda memberdirikan alat penerima, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.
Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.
2
2
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
INDONESIA
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK
A Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Sebelum penyambungan: Periksa perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang
tidak benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada alat penerima.
Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.
2 Sambungkan kabel antena.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke alat penerima.
Line out (see diagram )—only for KD-G396/KD-G395
Keluaran (lihat diagram )—hanya untuk KD-G396/KD-G395
Rear ground terminal
Terminal tanah belakang
Antenna terminal
Terminal antena
15 A fuse
Sekring 15 A
Ignition switch
Saklar kontak
Black
Hitam
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut
Yellow *2
Kuning *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai
mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)
Fuse block
Blok sekring
Red
Merah
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring
Blue
Biru
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
Biru dengan strip putih
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)—only for KD-G396/KD-G395
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)—hanya untuk KD-G396/KD-G395
White with black stripe
Putih dengan strip hitam
Gray with black stripe
Abu-abu dengan strip hitam
Gray
Abu-abu
Green with black stripe
Hijau dengan strip hitam
Green
Hijau
Purple with black stripe
Ungu dengan strip hitam
Purple
Ungu
White
Putih
Right speaker (front)
Speaker kanan (depan)
Left speaker (rear)
Speaker kiri (belakang)
Right speaker (rear)
Speaker kanan (belakang)
Left speaker (front)
Speaker kiri (depan)
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.
Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari alat penerima ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah
dihubungkan, selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the power
cannot be turned on.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the external amplifier (only for KD-G396/KD-G395) / Penyambungan penguat eksternal (hanya untuk KD-G396/KD-G395)
B
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat-penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.
• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat
dikontrol melalui alat penerima ini.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari alat penerima ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat.
Biarkan ujung speaker dari alat penerima ini tidak digunakan.
Remote lead
Ujung jauh
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada
Rear speakers
JVC Amplifier
Speaker-speaker
Penguat JVC
belakang
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)
Front speakers
Speaker-speaker depan
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to
the unit.
*
Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat
(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan
kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.
TROUBLESHOOTING
PEMECAHAN MASALAH
• The fuse blows.
• Sekring putus.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?
• Power cannot be turned on.
• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?
• No sound from the speakers.
• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?
• Sound is distorted.
• Suara terdistorsi.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan
tertebal?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
• Alat penerima menjadi panas.
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?
* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.
* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD RECEIVER
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0486-005A
[UT]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
How to reset your unit
[European Union only]
Warning:
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved
in a traffic accident.
How to forcibly eject a disc
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
The control panel illustrations used for explanation in this manual is of KD-G395/KD-G245.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to use the M MODE button
CONTENTS
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons will work
as different function buttons.
Control panel —
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245..................
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as
MO (monaural) button.
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........
Getting started................................
Basic operations...................................................
6
6
Radio operations .............................
7
Disc operations................................
8
To use these buttons for their original functions
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds
without pressing any of these buttons until the
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................
8
Sound adjustments.......................... 10
Other external component
operations ................................... 11
General settings — PSM .................. 11
Maintenance ................................... 13
More about this unit ........................ 14
Troubleshooting.............................. 16
Specifications.................................. 17
Detaching the control panel
For safety...
Attaching the control panel
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel —
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245
Parts identification
Display window
1 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons
2 0 (eject) button
;
a
s
RND (random) button
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
KD-G396/KD-G395: Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
DISC indicator
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), KD-G396/KD-G395:
RPT (repeat)
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),
ST (stereo)
LOUD (loudness) indicator
3
(standby/on attenuator) button
4
KD-G396/KD-G395: Remote sensor
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
Loading slot
Display window
EQ (equalizer) button
DISP (display) button
(control panel release) button
SRC (source) button
d
f
5
6
7
8
9
p
(folder),
g
h
j
k
l
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Tr (track) indicator
q 4 / ¢ buttons
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
Control dial
BAND button
SEL (select) button
M MODE button
MO (monaural) button
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button
Number buttons
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Volume level indicator / Time countdown indicator
Main display
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,
USER
/
z
RPT (repeat) button
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main elements and features
Remote controller —
RM-RK50
RM-RK50 is supplied only for KD-G396/KD-G395.
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle
in between.
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.
VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
SOUND button
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent
equalizer).
SOURCE button
Warning:
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may
explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,
cracking, or starting a fire:
3
4
5
• Selects the source.
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic settings
Getting started
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and
12.
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2 Setting the clock
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if
there is no disc in the unit.
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
! For FM/AM tuner
3
Finish the procedure.
⁄ Adjust the volume.
To check the current clock time while the
power is turned off
Volume level appears.
Clock time is shown on the display for
about 5 seconds. See also page 12.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 10.)
To drop the volume in a
moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press the
button again.
To turn off the power
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing stations in memory
Radio operations
You can preset six stations for each band.
~
Ÿ
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to
store into.
2
3
! Start searching for a station.
When a station is received,
searching stops.
To stop searching, press the
same button again.
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic
presetting is over.
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
1
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
2
Select a desired station frequency.
1
2
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
3
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.
Preset number flashes for a while.
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator
goes off.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous track
Listening to a preset station
1
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.
or
To go to the next or previous folder (for MP3/
WMA discs in KD-G396/KD-G395)
To check the other information while
listening to an FM or AM station
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
(for MP3/WMA discs in KD-G396/KD-G395)
directly
Clock Ô Frequency
To select a number from 01 – 06:
Disc operations
Playing a disc in the unit
To select a number from 07 – 12:
~ Turn on the power.
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—
01, 02, 03, and so on.
Ÿ
To select a particular track in a folder
(for MP3/WMA disc):
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
change the source or eject the disc.
To stop play and eject the disc
• Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track
(for KD-G396/KD-G395)
Other main functions
Skipping tracks quickly during play
• KD-G396/KD-G395: For MP3 or WMA discs, you can
skip tracks within the same folder
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose
number is a single digit (1 to 9)
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”
(see page 12)
A = Album name/performer (folder
name*2) [
name*2) [
beginning)
] = Track title (file
] = B = (back to the
1
2
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”
A = Folder name [ ] = File name
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10
tracks.
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number
The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
• After the last track, the first track will be selected
and vice versa.
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display
3
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the
TAG indicator will not light up.
2
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
2
Select your desired playback mode.
Repeat play
Changing the display information
7
Mode
Plays repeatedly
TRK RPT
FLDR RPT *
:
:
The current track. [
All tracks of the current folder.
]
While playing an audio CD or CD Text
[
]
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)
RPT OFF
:
Cancels.
Continued on the next page
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Random play
Adjusting the sound
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference.
Mode Plays at random
FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,
then the tracks of the next folder
1
2
and so on. [
]
ALL RND
RND OFF
:
:
All tracks of the current disc.
[
]
Cancels.
* KD-G396/KD-G395: Only while playing an MP3 or
a WMA disc.
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the
display
Indication, [Range]
BAS *1 (bass), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the bass.
Sound adjustments
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
MID *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
TRE *1 (treble), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the treble.
FAD *2 (fader), [R06 to F06]
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
Preset values
BAS MIDTRE LOUD
Indication (For)
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
USER
(Flat sound)
LOUD *3 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.
00
00
00
OFF
ROCK
(Rock or disco music)
+03 00 +02 OFF
+01 00 +03 OFF
+02 +01 +02 OFF
+04 –02 +01 OFF
+03 00 +03 OFF
VOL (volume), [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *4
Adjust the volume.
CLASSIC
(Classical music)
POPS
(Light music)
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader
level to “00.”
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be
applied to all sound modes.
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See
page 12 for details.)
HIP HOP
(Funk or rap music)
2
3
4
*
*
*
JAZZ
(Jazz music)
BAS: Bass; MID: Mid-range; TRE: Treble; LOUD: Loudness
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other external component
operations
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items
listed in the table on page 12.
You can connect an external component to the
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
1
2
3
Select a PSM item.
Portable audio player, etc
Adjust the PSM item selected.
Stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
~
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM
items if necessary.
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and
start playing the source.
! Adjust the volume.
Finish the procedure.
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 10.)
To check the other information while
listening to an external component
Clock Ô AUX IN
Continued on the next page
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indications
Item
Selectable settings, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
DEMO
Display demonstration
• DEMO ON
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].
Cancels.
• DEMO OFF
• ON
:
:
CLK DISP *1
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power
Clock display
is turned off.
• OFF
: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds
when the power is turned off, [6].
CLOCK H
Hour adjustment
1 – 12
00 – 59
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]
CLOCK M
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]
Minute adjustment
DIMMER
Dimmer
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL *2
Scroll
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
AUX ADJ
Auxiliary input level
adjustment
A.ADJ 00
– A.ADJ 05
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source from external component
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
TAG DISP *3
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
Amplifier gain control
• LOW PWR
• HIGH PWR
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker
is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF”
that you save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
For KD-G396/KD-G395.
2
3
*
*
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To keep discs clean
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Connectors
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
Sticker and
sticker residue
Stick-on label
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
Center holder
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• KD-G396/KD-G395: MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words
“file” and “track” are used interchangeably) are
recorded in “folders.”
• KD-G396/KD-G395: While fast-forwarding or
reversing on an MP3 or WMA disc, you can only hear
intermittent sounds.
More about this unit
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• KD-G396/KD-G395 can only play back files of the
same type as those which are detected first if a disc
includes both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA
files.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,
disc play will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for
the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will
be automatically tuned in.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) formats. KD-G396/
KD-G395 can also play back CD-Rs/CD-RWs in MP3/
WMA formats.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
KD-G396/KD-G395: Playing an MP3/WMA
disc
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
Changing the source
• If you change the source, playback also stops
(without ejecting the disc).
Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,
disc play starts from where it has been stopped
previously.
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 64 characters
General settings—PSM
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
– Joliet: up to 32 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 126 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Store stations manually.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
•
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you
used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on
the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file
names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks are not played back in the order you
have intended.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),
album name). numbers, and a limited number of symbols.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
CD PLAYER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Type:
Compact disc player
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Signal Detection
System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Dynamic Range:
93 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
For KD-G396/KD-G395:
12 dB at 60 Hz
12 dB at 1 kHz
12 dB at 7.5 kHz
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
Mid-range:
Treble:
Max. Bit Rate:
320 kbps
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
For KD-G396/KD-G395:
Max. Bit Rate:
192 kbps
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Line-Out Level/
Impedance:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Other Terminal:
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C
Temperature:
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Installation Size:
Panel Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
AM:
188 mm × 58 mm × 5 mm
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
Mass:
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
50 dB Quieting
Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel
65 dB
Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
30 dB
AM Tuner
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
EN, CT
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0807DTSMDTJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KD-G396/KD-G395/KD-G245
Installation/Connection Manual
安裝/連接手冊
0807DTSMDTJEIN
EN, CT
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0486-010A
[UT]
ENGLISH
中文
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does
not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.
本機僅可使用直流 12 V、負極接地的電源系統。如果您的車輛沒有這一電源
壓變換器,可以在 JVC 汽車音響分銷商處買到。
系統,則需要 一個電
WARNINGS
警告
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
為防止短路,建議在安裝本機之前
,拔開電池的負極,並把所有電路都連接好。
• 安裝完畢後務必將本機的地線重新接至車身。
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
注意:
Notes:
•
把保險 絲更換為額定負荷值的保險 絲。如果保險 絲經常燒壞,請向
• 後置和前 揚聲器的最大輸入功率應大於 50 W,其阻抗為 4 Ω - 8 Ω。如果最大功率小於 50 W,
請調校“AMP GAIN”設定值,以防止揚聲器損壞。(參閱使用說明書的第 12 頁。)
• 為防止電源短路,請用絕緣帶包住未使用電線的端子。
JVC 汽車音響分銷商詢問。
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 12 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
置
• 本機使用後,散熱片會很熱。因此,在移出本機時,小心不要 觸摸散熱片。
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
Heat sink / 散熱片
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
電源和揚聲器接線注意事項:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
• 切勿把揚聲器導線接頭接至電池,否則本機將會嚴重損壞。
will be seriously damaged.
• 在把揚聲器導線接頭接至揚聲器之前
,檢查您汽車上的揚聲器線路。
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC car audio dealer
immediately.
用於安裝和連接的零件清單
下列零件隨本機提供。若有任何遺漏,立刻咨詢您的 JVC 汽車音響經銷商。
A / B
C
D
Hard case (for KD-G396/KD-G395)/Control panel
Sleeve
Trim plate
硬盒(對應 KD-G396/KD-G395)/控制面
板
外套機殼 裝飾框
E
F
G
H
Power cord
電路連接用的配線束
Washer (ø5)
墊圈(ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
鎖定螺母(M5)
Mounting bolt
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)
緊固
螺栓
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)
For KD-G396/KD-G395 / 對應 KD-G396/KD-G395
I
J
K
L
Rubber cushion
橡膠防震墊
Handles
板條型把手
Remote controller
遙控器
Battery
電池
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
安裝(裝設、固定在儀表板內)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
下面
的圖解表示了典型的安裝程序。如果您有問題,或需要 有關配套元件的資料,請向 JVC
汽車音響分銷商或配套元件供應公司詢問。
• 如果您不能確定如何正確地安裝本機,應請合格的技術人員來安裝。
Do the required electrical connections.
進行所需的電路連接。
For KD-G396/KD-G395
對應 KD-G396/KD-G395
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
弄彎機殼的突舌,把外套機殼牢固
在儀表板內。
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
拆卸本機
在拆卸本機前
,應將本機後部的固定和連接部分鬆開。
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
按圖所示,將兩片板條型把手插入卡槽,然
後輕穩地從兩側向
外拉兩片把手,本機隨
之拉出。
When using the optional stay / 若選用支撐架
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / 若不使用外套機殼安裝本機
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Stay (option)
支撐架(選用的)
以豐田牌(TOYOTA)汽車為例:首先取出汽車收音機,然後將本機裝入其空出的位置
。
Fire wall
防火板
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
儀表板
Bracket*2
托座*2
Screw (option)
螺絲釘(選用的)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
平頭螺絲釘(M5 × 8 mm)*2
Pocket
空殼
Bracket*2
托座*2
Note :When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm -long screws. If longer screws are used,
they could damage the unit.
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
將本機安裝在少於 30˚ 的角度
。
注意 :把本機安裝在托座上時,務必使用 8 mm 長的螺絲釘。如使用過長的螺絲釘,會損壞本機。
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
您豎起本機時,小心不要 損壞底部的保險 絲。
不隨本機提供。
2
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
中文
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
電路連接
A
Typical connections / 典型的接線方法
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
接線前:仔細檢查汽車內的線路。不正確的接線會導致本機嚴重 損壞。
電源線的引線和車身的連接器引線在顏色上可能有所不同。
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
1 依照下圖所示之次序連接電源
2 將天線的電線連接起來。
3 最後,把配線束的插頭插在本機上。
線的顏色導線。
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the antenna cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
Line out (see diagram )— only for KD-G396/KD-G395
輸出端子(參閱圖表 )—僅對應 KD-G396/KD-G395
Rear ground terminal
本機後背接地端子
Antenna terminal
15 A fuse
15 A 保險
天線端子
絲
Ignition switch
點火開關
Black
黑色
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
接至金屬體或汽車底盤
Yellow *2
黃色 *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery
(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
接至保險 絲單元內的帶電端子,保險 絲單元與車裝電池相連接
(用於旁路點火開關)(恆定 12 V)
Fuse block
保險 絲單元
Red
紅色
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
接至保險 絲單元內的附屬端子
Blue
藍色
To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)
接至自動天線(若有裝設)(最大 250 mA)
Blue with white stripe
藍色帶有白色條紋
To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)— only for KD-G396/KD-G395
連接至其他裝置上的遙控導線(最大 200 mA)—僅對應 KD-G396/KD-G395
White with black stripe
白色帶有黑色條紋
Gray with black stripe
灰色帶有黑色條紋
Gray
灰色
Green with black stripe
綠色帶有黑色條紋
Green
綠色
Purple with black stripe
Purple
紫色
White
白色
紫色帶有黑色條紋
Left speaker (front)
Right speaker (front)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
左揚聲器(前
置
)
右揚聲器(前
置
)
左揚聲器(後置
)
右揚聲器(後置
)
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
不隨本機提供。
本機未安裝時,進行工作狀況
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise the
power cannot be turned on.
檢查之前
,必須把這導線接上,否則
不能開啟電源
。
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the external amplifier (only for KD-G396/KD-G395) 連接至外部功率放大器(僅對應 KD-G396/KD-G395)
B
/
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
您可以連接功率放大器以提昇尊
將遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)和其他裝置上的遙控導線連接起來,以便可以經由本機進行
遙控。
• 將揚聲器和本機拔開,再接上功率放大器。將本機的揚聲器接線放置不用。
車的音響系統。
•
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker
leads of this unit unused.
Remote lead
遙控導線
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-型連接導線(不隨本機提供)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
遙控導線(藍色帶有白色條紋)
To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any
連接至其他裝置上的遙控導線或自動天線(若有裝設)
JVC Amplifier
後置
Rear speakers
揚聲器
JVC 功率放大器
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
信號導線(不隨本機提供)
Front speakers
揚聲器
前
置
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to
the unit.
*
將地線與金屬車體或者汽車底盤緊密連接,連接處應該沒有被油漆覆蓋(如果已塗上油漆,在連接電
線前,將油漆刮去)。如果不這樣做,可能會損壞本機。
故障排除
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• 保險絲燒斷。
* 檢查紅色導線接頭和黑色導線接頭是否接觸正確?
• 電源不能接通。
* 檢查黃色導線接頭是否接上?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• 揚聲器沒有聲音。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出導線接頭是否短路?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• 聲音失真。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“–”是否共同接地?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• 噪音干擾音響。
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* 後接地端子與車身是否使用較短和較厚
的電線連接?
• 本機發熱。
* 檢查揚聲器輸出端子是否接地?
* 檢查揚聲器的左(L)、右(R)端子的負極“–”是否共同接地?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• 本機完全不能操作。
* 您是否已經重
置您的機組?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD RECEIVER
RÉCEPTEUR CD
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 5.
Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 5.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.
INSTRUCTIONS
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS
GET0484-003A
[EX/EU]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Caution on volume setting:
Warning:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved
in a traffic accident.
How to reset your unit
This symbol is only valid in
the European Union.
Information for Users on Disposal of Old
Equipment
This symbol indicates that the product with
this symbol should not be disposed as general
household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to
dispose of this product, please do so in accordance
with applicable national legislation or other rules in
your country and municipality. By disposing of this
product correctly, you will help to conserve natural
resources and will help prevent potential negative
effects on the environment and human health.
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
How to forcibly eject a disc
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to use the M MODE button
CONTENTS
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,
then the number buttons and 5 / ∞ buttons will work
as different function buttons.
Control panel
— KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341.............
4
Ex.: When number button 2 works as
MO (monaural) button.
Getting started................................
Basic operations...................................................
5
5
Radio operations .............................
6
FM RDS operations...........................
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme....
7
7
To use these buttons for their original functions
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds
without pressing any of these buttons until the
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.
Disc operations................................
9
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................
9
Sound adjustments.......................... 12
General settings — PSM .................. 13
Other external component operations .... 15
Maintenance ................................... 16
More about this unit ........................ 17
Troubleshooting.............................. 19
Specifications.................................. 21
Detaching the control panel
Note: Only for [EX] model users in UK and
European countries
Attaching the control panel
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided
with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will
help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
The control panel illustrations used for explanation
in this manual is of KD-G343 / KD-G341.
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel —
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341
Parts identification
Display window
;
a
s
RND (random) button
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
1 0 (eject) button
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
/ ¢ buttons
Loading slot
(standby/on attenuator) button
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
DISC indicator
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),
ST (stereo)
LOUD (loudness) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Volume level indicator / Time countdown indicator
Main display
Sound mode (c-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators—
JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS, USER
d
f
BAND button
Display window
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button
DISP (display) button
g
h
9 5(up)/∞(down) buttons
p
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
(control panel release) button
SRC (source) button
Control dial
SEL (select) button
M MODE button
EQ (equalizer) button
MO (monaural) button
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button
Number buttons
j
k
l
/
z
x
RPT (repeat) button
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic settings
Getting started
• See also “General settings — PSM” on
pages 13 – 15.
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
1
2
Ÿ
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if
there is no disc in the unit.
1 Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2 Setting the clock
! For FM/AM tuner
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or
“12H” (hour).
⁄ Adjust the volume.
3
Finish the procedure.
Volume level appears.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
To check the current clock time while the
power is turned off
page 12.)
Clock time is shown on the
display for about 5 seconds. See
also page 13.
To drop the volume in a
moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press the
button again.
To turn off the power
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
Radio operations
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.
Ÿ
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator
goes off.
Storing stations in memory
! Start searching for a station.
You can preset six stations for each band.
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to
store into.
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
1
2
3
2
Select a desired station frequency.
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic
presetting is over.
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
FM RDS operations
What you can do with RDS
1
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an
additional signal along with their regular programme
signals.
2
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the
following:
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby
Receptions (see pages 8, 9, and 14)
3
• Tracing the same programme automatically
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 9)
• Programme Search (see pages 9 and 14)
Preset number flashes for a while.
Searching for your favorite
FM RDS programme
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite
programme by searching for a PTY code.
• To store your favorite programme types, see the
following.
Listening to a preset station
1
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.
~
The last selected PTY code
appears.
To check the current clock time while
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station
Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme
types.
• For FM RDS stations, see page 9.
Frequency Ô Clock
or
Select one of the PTY codes (see
page 9).
Continued on the next page
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
! Start searching for your favorite
Using the standby receptions
TA Standby Reception
programme.
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any
source other than AM.
If there is a station broadcasting a programme
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that
station is tuned in.
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the
current level is lower than the preset level (see
page 14).
To activate TA Standby Reception
Storing your favorite programme
types
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator
either lights up or flashes.
You can store six favorite programme types.
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is
activated.
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening
to an FM station without the RDS signals required for
TA Standby Reception.)
Preset programme types in the number buttons
(1 to 6):
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another
station providing these signals. The TP indicator will
stop flashing and remain lit.
1
2
Select a PTY code (see pages 7 and 8).
Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to
store into.
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception
The TP indicator goes off.
PTY Standby Reception
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any
source other than AM.
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for
PTY Standby Reception, see page 14.
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception
is activated.
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes
into other preset numbers.
Finish the procedure.
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is
not yet activated.
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to
another station providing these signals. The PTY
indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select
“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 14). The PTY indicator
goes off.
To check the current clock time while
listening to an FM RDS station
Station name (PS) = Station
Frequency = Programme
type (PTY) = Clock = (back to
the beginning)
Tracing the same programme—
Network-Tracking Reception
When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly
broadcasting the same programme with stronger
signals (see the illustration below).
PTY codes
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA,
CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M
(music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS,
OTHER M (music), WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL,
RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY,
NATION M (music), OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking
Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 14.
Disc operations
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas
(01 – 05)
Playing a disc in the unit
~ Turn on the power.
Ÿ
Automatic station selection—
Programme Search
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset
station is tuned in.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
change the source or eject the disc.
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF
data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the
same programme as the original preset station is
broadcasting.
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another
station using programme search.
• See also page 14.
Continued on the next page
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To stop play and eject
the disc
Other main functions
• Press SRC to listen to
another playback source.
Skipping tracks quickly during play
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the
same folder.
To fast-forward or reverse
the track
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose
number is a single digit (1 to 9)
To go to the next or
previous track
1
2
To go to the next or
previous folder (only for
MP3 or WMA discs)
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10
tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be selected
and vice versa.
To select a number from 01 – 06:
3
To select a number from 07 – 12:
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—01,
02, 03, and so on.
To select a particular track in a folder
(for MP3 or WMA disc):
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the display information
While playing an audio CD or CD Text
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
A = B = Disc title/performer*1 = Track
title*1 [ ] = (back to the beginning)
2
Select your desired playback mode.
Repeat play
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”
(see page 15)
Mode
Plays repeatedly
TRK RPT : The current track. [
FLDR RPT* : All tracks of the current folder.
]
A = B = Album name/performer (folder
name*2) [
name*2) [
] = Track title (file
] = (back to the beginning)
[
]
RPT OFF : Cancels.
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”
A = B = Folder name [ ] = File name
7
Random play
[
] = (back to the beginning)
Mode
Plays at random
FLDR RND* : All tracks of the current folder, then
the tracks of the next folder and so
A
B
:
:
The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
Clock with the current track number
on. [
]
ALL RND : All tracks of the current disc.
[
]
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display.
RND OFF : Cancels.
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the
TAG indicator will not light up.
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.
2
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the
display.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the sound
Sound adjustments
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference.
music genre (c-EQ: custom equalizer).
1
2
1
2
Preset values
BAS
TRE
LOUD
(bass) (treble) (loudness)
Indication (For)
Indication, [Range]
USER
(Flat sound)
BAS*1 (bass), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the bass.
00
00
OFF
ON
ROCK
(Rock or disco music)
TRE*1 (treble), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the treble.
+03 +01
FAD*2 (fader), [R06 to F06]
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
CLASSIC
(Classical music)
+01
–02
OFF
OFF
ON
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
POPS
(Light music)
+04 +01
LOUD*1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.
HIP HOP
(Funk or rap music)
+02
00
JAZZ
(Jazz music)
VOL (volume), [00 to 50 or 00 to 30]*3
Adjust the volume.
+02 +03
OFF
1
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently
selected sound mode (c-EQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader
level to “00.”
2
3
*
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See
page 15 for details.)
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items
listed in the table below, on page 14 and 15.
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.
1
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM
items if necessary.
2
Select a PSM item.
Finish the procedure.
Indications
Item
Selectable settings, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
DEMO
Display demonstration
• DEMO ON
• DEMO OFF
:
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [5].
Cancels.
CLK DISP *1
Clock display
• ON
:
:
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [5].
• OFF
CLOCK H
0 – 23 (1 – 12) [Initial: 0 (0:00)], [5].
Hour adjustment
CLOCK M
00 – 59
[Initial: 00 (0:00)], [5].
Minute adjustment
24H/12H
Time display mode
• 24H
• 12H
:
See also page 5 for setting.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select
“OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Continued on the next page
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indications
Item
Selectable settings, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
CLK ADJ *2
Clock adjustment
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock
time) data in the RDS signal.
Cancels.
AF-REG *2
Alternative
frequency/
regionalization
reception
• AF
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit
switches to another station (the programme may differ from the
one currently received), [9, 17].
• The AF indicator lights up.
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit
switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.
• The AF and REG indicators light up.
• AF REG
• OFF
Cancels.
PTY-STBY *2
OFF, PTY codes Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [9].
PTY standby
TA VOL *2
Traffic
announcement
volume
VOL 00
[Initial: VOL 15]
– VOL 50
(or VOL 00
– VOL 30)*3
P-SEARCH *2
Programme search
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [9].
Cancels.
DIMMER
Dimmer
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
TEL
• MUTING 1/
MUTING 2
• OFF
:
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular
phone.
Cancels.
Telephone muting
SCROLL *4
Scroll
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
2
*
*
*
Only for FM RDS stations.
Depends on the amplifier gain control.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
3
4
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indications
AUX ADJ
Auxiliary input level — A.ADJ 05
adjustment
Item
Selectable settings, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
A.ADJ 00
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source from external component
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
TAG DISP
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [11].
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
Amplifier gain control
• LOW PWR
• HIGH PWR
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is
less than 50 W to avoid them from damaging the speaker.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
IF BAND
Intermediate
frequency band
• AUTO
• WIDE
:
:
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noise between
close stations. (The stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to the interference noise from adjacent stations, but the
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
Other external component operations
You can connect an external component to the AUX
(auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
! Adjust the volume.
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want.
(See page 12.)
Portable audio player, etc.
To check the clock time while listening to an
external component
Stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
~
AUX IN Ô Clock
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and
start playing the source.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To keep discs clean
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
Connectors
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
Do not use the following discs:
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Warped disc
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
Center holder
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.
More about this unit
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,
disc play will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/
CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA
formats.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will
be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as
those which are detected first if a disc includes both
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for
the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
FM RDS operations
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without
receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking
Reception will not operate correctly.
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower
than the preset level.
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is
also activated automatically. On the other hand,
Network-Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated
without deactivating Alternative Frequency
Reception. (See page 14.)
Continued on the next page
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
Media Audio.
®
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Changing the source
• If you change the source, playback also stops
(without ejecting the disc).
Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,
disc play starts from where it has been stopped
previously.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
General settings—PSM
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
200 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Store stations manually.
Connect the aerial firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you
used for recording.
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on
the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
Continued on the next page
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file
names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks are not played back in the order you
have intended.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),
album name). numbers, and a limited number of symbols.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
CD PLAYER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Type:
Compact disc player
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Signal Detection
System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Dynamic Range:
93 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
12 dB at 100 Hz
12 dB at 10 kHz
Max. Bit Rate:
320 kbps
Treble:
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
Max. Bit Rate:
192 kbps
Line-Out Level/
Impedance:
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Other Terminal:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
Grounding System:
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C
Temperature:
FM:
AM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz
Installation Size:
Panel Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
Mass:
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting
Sensitivity:
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Alternate Channel
65 dB
Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
30 dB
MW Tuner
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
LW Tuner
Sensitivity:
50 μV
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?
Réinitialisez votre appareil
Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil
Dear Customer,
Cher(e) client(e),
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic
compatibility and electrical safety.
Cet appareil est conforme aux directives et normes
européennes en vigueur concernant la compatibilité
électromagnétique et à la sécurité électrique.
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited
is:
Représentant européen de la société Victor Company of Japan,
Limited:
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
Allemagne
Germany
EN, FR
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0807DTSMDTJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341
Installation/Connection Manual
Manuel d’installation/raccordement
0807DTSMDTJEIN
EN, FR
GET0484-010A
[EX/EU]
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle
does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.
Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE.
Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez
acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.
WARNINGS
AVERTISSEMENTS
Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et
d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.
• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la
voiture après l’installation.
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all
electrical connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Notes:
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at
the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than
50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the
INSTRUCTIONS).
Remarques:
• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur
d’autoradios JVC.
• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière
et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est
inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 15 du
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.
• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande
isolante.
• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant
cet appareil.
Heat sink
Dissipateur de chaleur
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:
PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit
• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,
will be seriously damaged.
l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in
your car.
• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des
enceintes de votre voiture.
Parts list for installation and connection
Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.
Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur
autoradio JVC immédiatement.
A
B
C
Control panel
Panneau de commande
Sleeve
Manchon
Trim plate
Plaque d’assemblage
D
E
F
Power cord
Cordon d’alimentation
Washer (ø5)
Rondelle (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)
G
H
I
Mounting bolt
Rubber cushion
Amortisseur en caoutchouc
Handles
Poignées
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)
Boulon de montage
(M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)
L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin
d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie
d’approvisionnement.
INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information
regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying
kits.
• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien
qualifié.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
Do the required electrical connections.
Réalisez les connexions électriques.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Tordez les languettes appropriées
pour maintenir le manchon en place.
Removing the unit
Retrait de l’appareil
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as
illustrated so that the unit can be removed.
Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon
illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.
When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du
hauban en option
When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil
scans utiliser de manchon
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.
Stay (option)
Hauban (en option)
Fire wall
Cloison
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Dashboard
Tableau de bord
Bracket*2
Support*2
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Screw (option)
Vis (en option)
Pocket
Poche
Bracket*2
Support*2
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins
de 30˚.
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws
are used, they could damage the unit.
Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de
8 mm. Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.
1
1
*
*
Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
2
2
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
FRANÇAIS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES
Typical Connections / Raccordements typiques
A
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious
damage to this unit.
Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion
incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en
couleur.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the aerial cord.
1
Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.
2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.
Note: If your vehicle does not have any accessory terminal, move the fuse from the fuse position 1
(initial position) to fuse position 2, and connect the red lead (A7) to the positive (+) battery terminal.
• The yellow lead (A4) is not used in this case.
Remarque: Si votre véhicule ne possède pas de borne accessoire, déplacez le fusible de la position de fusible
1 (position originale) à la position de fusible 2 et connectez le fil rouge (A7) à la borne positive (+) de la
batterie.
• Le fil jaune (A4) n’est pas utilisé dans ce cas.
15 A fuse
Fusible 15 A
Line out (see diagram
Sortie de ligne (voir le diagramme
)
)
Fuse position 2 / Position de fusible 2
Fuse position 1 / Position de fusible 1
Aerial terminal
Borne de l’antenne
Rear ground terminal
Borne arrière de masse
Ignition switch
Interrupteur d’allumage
Black
Noir
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture
Yellow *2
Jaune *2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing
the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture
(en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)
Fuse block
Porte-fusible
Red
Rouge
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible
Blue with white stripe
Bleu avec bande blanche
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une
(200 mA max.)
Brown
Marron
To cellular phone system
À un système de téléphone cellulaire
White with black stripe
Blanc avec bande noire
White
Blanc
Gray with black stripe
Gris avec bande noire
Gray
Gris
Green with black stripe
Vert avec bande noire
Green
Vert
Purple with black stripe
Violet avec bande noire
Purple
Violet
Left speaker (front)
Enceinte gauche (avant)
Right speaker (front)
Enceinte droit (avant)
Left speaker (rear)
Enceinte gauche (arrière)
Right speaker (rear)
Enceinte droit (arrière)
1
2
1
2
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Non fourni avec cet autoradio.
Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut
pas être mis sous tension.
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected; otherwise, the
power cannot be turned on.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
Connecting the external amplifier / Connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it
can be controlled through this unit.
Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système autoradio.
• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de
l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.
•
Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of • Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils
this unit unused.
d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.
Remote lead
Fil d’alimentation à distance
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Fil d’alimentation à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne
automatique s’il y en a une
Rear speakers
Enceintes arrière
JVC Amplifier
JVC Amplificateur
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)
Front speakers
Enceintes avant
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place not coated with
paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to
the unit.
*
Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas
recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil
peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.
TROUBLESHOOTING
EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES
• The fuse blows.
• Le fusible saute.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?
• Power cannot be turned on.
• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?
• No sound from the speakers.
• Pas de son des enceintes.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?
• Sound is distorted.
• Le son est déformé.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
• Interférence avec les sons.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?
• This unit becomes hot.
• L’appareil devient chaud.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?
* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?
• This unit does not work at all.
• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.
* Have you reset your unit?
* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD RECEIVER
CD-RECEIVER
РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 5.
Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 5.
Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 5.
For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.
Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.
Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.
INSTRUCTIONS
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
GET0484-006A
[EY]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Caution on volume setting:
Warning:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved
in a traffic accident.
How to reset your unit
This symbol is only valid in
the European Union.
Information for Users on Disposal of Old
Equipment
This symbol indicates that the product with
this symbol should not be disposed as general
household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to
dispose of this product, please do so in accordance
with applicable national legislation or other rules in
your country and municipality. By disposing of this
product correctly, you will help to conserve natural
resources and will help prevent potential negative
effects on the environment and human health.
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
How to forcibly eject a disc
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to use the M MODE button
CONTENTS
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,
then the number buttons and 5 / ∞ buttons will work
as different function buttons.
Control panel
— KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341.............
4
Ex.: When number button 2 works as
MO (monaural) button.
Getting started................................
Basic operations...................................................
5
5
Radio operations .............................
6
FM RDS operations...........................
Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme....
7
7
To use these buttons for their original functions
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds
without pressing any of these buttons until the
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.
Disc operations................................
9
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................
9
Sound adjustments.......................... 12
General settings — PSM .................. 13
Other external component operations .... 15
Maintenance ................................... 16
More about this unit ........................ 17
Troubleshooting.............................. 19
Specifications.................................. 21
Detaching the control panel
For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided
with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on
the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will
help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.
Attaching the control panel
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Temperature inside the car...
The control panel illustrations used for explanation
in this manual is of KD-G343 / KD-G341.
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel —
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341
Parts identification
Display window
;
a
s
RND (random) button
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
1 0 (eject) button
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
/ ¢ buttons
Loading slot
(standby/on attenuator) button
Disc information indicators—
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
DISC indicator
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)
RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),
ST (stereo)
LOUD (loudness) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Volume level indicator / Time countdown indicator
Main display
Sound mode (c-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators—
JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS, USER
d
f
BAND button
Display window
T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button
DISP (display) button
g
h
9 5(up)/∞(down) buttons
p
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
(control panel release) button
SRC (source) button
Control dial
SEL (select) button
M MODE button
EQ (equalizer) button
MO (monaural) button
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button
Number buttons
j
k
l
/
z
x
RPT (repeat) button
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic settings
Getting started
• See also “General settings — PSM” on
pages 13 – 15.
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
1
2
Ÿ
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if
there is no disc in the unit.
1 Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2 Setting the clock
! For FM/AM tuner
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or
“12H” (hour).
⁄ Adjust the volume.
3
Finish the procedure.
Volume level appears.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
To check the current clock time while the
power is turned off
page 12.)
Clock time is shown on the
display for about 5 seconds. See
also page 13.
To drop the volume in a
moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press the
button again.
To turn off the power
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
Radio operations
~
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.
Ÿ
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator
goes off.
Storing stations in memory
! Start searching for a station.
You can preset six stations for each band.
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
When a station is received, searching stops.
To stop searching, press the same button
again.
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to
store into.
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
1
2
3
2
Select a desired station frequency.
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic
presetting is over.
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
FM RDS operations
What you can do with RDS
1
RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an
additional signal along with their regular programme
signals.
2
By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the
following:
• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)
• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby
Receptions (see pages 8, 9, and 14)
3
• Tracing the same programme automatically
—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 9)
• Programme Search (see pages 9 and 14)
Preset number flashes for a while.
Searching for your favorite
FM RDS programme
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite
programme by searching for a PTY code.
• To store your favorite programme types, see the
following.
Listening to a preset station
1
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.
~
The last selected PTY code
appears.
To check the current clock time while
listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station
Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme
types.
• For FM RDS stations, see page 9.
Frequency Ô Clock
or
Select one of the PTY codes (see
page 9).
Continued on the next page
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
! Start searching for your favorite
Using the standby receptions
TA Standby Reception
programme.
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any
source other than AM.
If there is a station broadcasting a programme
of the same PTY code as you have selected, that
station is tuned in.
The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the
current level is lower than the preset level (see
page 14).
To activate TA Standby Reception
Storing your favorite programme
types
The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator
either lights up or flashes.
You can store six favorite programme types.
• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is
activated.
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is
not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening
to an FM station without the RDS signals required for
TA Standby Reception.)
Preset programme types in the number buttons
(1 to 6):
To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another
station providing these signals. The TP indicator will
stop flashing and remain lit.
1
2
Select a PTY code (see pages 7 and 8).
Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to
store into.
To deactivate the TA Standby Reception
The TP indicator goes off.
PTY Standby Reception
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any
source other than AM.
Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected
To activate and select your favorite PTY code for
PTY Standby Reception, see page 14.
The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.
• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception
is activated.
3
4
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY codes
into other preset numbers.
Finish the procedure.
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is
not yet activated.
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to
another station providing these signals. The PTY
indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select
“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 14). The PTY indicator
goes off.
To check the current clock time while
listening to an FM RDS station
Station name (PS) = Station
Frequency = Programme
type (PTY) = Clock = (back to
the beginning)
Tracing the same programme—
Network-Tracking Reception
When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly
broadcasting the same programme with stronger
signals (see the illustration below).
PTY codes
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA,
CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M
(music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS,
OTHER M (music), WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL,
RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY,
NATION M (music), OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT
When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking
Reception is activated.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see “AF-REG” on page 14.
Disc operations
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas
(01 – 05)
Playing a disc in the unit
~ Turn on the power.
Ÿ
Automatic station selection—
Programme Search
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset
station is tuned in.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
change the source or eject the disc.
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF
data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the
same programme as the original preset station is
broadcasting.
• The unit takes some time to tune in to another
station using programme search.
• See also page 14.
Continued on the next page
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To stop play and eject
the disc
Other main functions
• Press SRC to listen to
another playback source.
Skipping tracks quickly during play
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the
same folder.
To fast-forward or reverse
the track
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track whose
number is a single digit (1 to 9)
To go to the next or
previous track
1
2
To go to the next or
previous folder (only for
MP3 or WMA discs)
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10
tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be selected
and vice versa.
To select a number from 01 – 06:
3
To select a number from 07 – 12:
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—01,
02, 03, and so on.
To select a particular track in a folder
(for MP3 or WMA disc):
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the display information
While playing an audio CD or CD Text
Selecting the playback modes
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
A = B = Disc title/performer*1 = Track
title*1 [ ] = (back to the beginning)
2
Select your desired playback mode.
Repeat play
7
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”
(see page 15)
Mode
Plays repeatedly
TRK RPT : The current track. [
FLDR RPT* : All tracks of the current folder.
]
A = B = Album name/performer (folder
name*2) [
name*2) [
] = Track title (file
] = (back to the beginning)
[
]
RPT OFF : Cancels.
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”
A = B = Folder name [ ] = File name
7
Random play
[
] = (back to the beginning)
Mode
Plays at random
FLDR RND* : All tracks of the current folder, then
the tracks of the next folder and so
A
B
:
:
The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
Clock with the current track number
on. [
]
ALL RND : All tracks of the current disc.
[
]
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display.
RND OFF : Cancels.
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the
TAG indicator will not light up.
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.
2
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the
display.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the sound
Sound adjustments
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference.
music genre (c-EQ: custom equalizer).
1
2
1
2
Preset values
BAS
TRE
LOUD
(bass) (treble) (loudness)
Indication (For)
Indication, [Range]
USER
(Flat sound)
BAS*1 (bass), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the bass.
00
00
OFF
ON
ROCK
(Rock or disco music)
TRE*1 (treble), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the treble.
+03 +01
FAD*2 (fader), [R06 to F06]
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
CLASSIC
(Classical music)
+01
–02
OFF
OFF
ON
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
POPS
(Light music)
+04 +01
LOUD*1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.
HIP HOP
(Funk or rap music)
+02
00
JAZZ
(Jazz music)
VOL (volume), [00 to 50 or 00 to 30]*3
Adjust the volume.
+02 +03
OFF
1
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently
selected sound mode (c-EQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader
level to “00.”
2
3
*
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See
page 15 for details.)
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items
listed in the table below, on page 14 and 15.
3
Adjust the PSM item selected.
1
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM
items if necessary.
2
Select a PSM item.
Finish the procedure.
Indications
Item
Selectable settings, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
DEMO
Display demonstration
• DEMO ON
• DEMO OFF
:
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [5].
Cancels.
CLK DISP *1
Clock display
• ON
:
:
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the
power is turned off.
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about
5 seconds when the power is turned off, [5].
• OFF
CLOCK H
0 – 23 (1 – 12) [Initial: 0 (0:00)], [5].
Hour adjustment
CLOCK M
00 – 59
[Initial: 00 (0:00)], [5].
Minute adjustment
24H/12H
Time display mode
• 24H
• 12H
:
See also page 5 for setting.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select
“OFF” to save the car’s battery.
Continued on the next page
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indications
Item
Selectable settings, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
CLK ADJ *2
Clock adjustment
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock
time) data in the RDS signal.
Cancels.
AF-REG *2
Alternative
frequency/
regionalization
reception
• AF
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit
switches to another station (the programme may differ from the
one currently received), [9, 17].
• The AF indicator lights up.
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit
switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.
• The AF and REG indicators light up.
• AF REG
• OFF
Cancels.
PTY-STBY *2
OFF, PTY codes Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [9].
PTY standby
TA VOL *2
Traffic
announcement
volume
VOL 00
[Initial: VOL 15]
– VOL 50
(or VOL 00
– VOL 30)*3
P-SEARCH *2
Programme search
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Activates Programme Search, [9].
Cancels.
DIMMER
Dimmer
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
TEL
• MUTING 1/
MUTING 2
• OFF
:
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular
phone.
Cancels.
Telephone muting
SCROLL *4
Scroll
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
2
*
*
*
Only for FM RDS stations.
Depends on the amplifier gain control.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
3
4
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indications
AUX ADJ
Auxiliary input level — A.ADJ 05
adjustment
Item
Selectable settings, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
A.ADJ 00
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source from external component
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
TAG DISP
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [11].
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
Amplifier gain control
• LOW PWR
• HIGH PWR
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker is
less than 50 W to avoid them from damaging the speaker.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
IF BAND
Intermediate
frequency band
• AUTO
• WIDE
:
:
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noise between
close stations. (The stereo effect may be lost.)
Subject to the interference noise from adjacent stations, but the
sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
Other external component operations
You can connect an external component to the AUX
(auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
! Adjust the volume.
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want.
(See page 12.)
Portable audio player, etc.
To check the clock time while listening to an
external component
Stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
~
AUX IN Ô Clock
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and
start playing the source.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To keep discs clean
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
Connectors
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
Do not use the following discs:
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Warped disc
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
How to handle discs
When removing a disc from its
Center holder
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.
More about this unit
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,
disc play will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/
CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA
formats.
Tuner operations
Storing stations in memory
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will
be automatically tuned in.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as
those which are detected first if a disc includes both
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for
the following reasons:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
FM RDS operations
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without
receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking
Reception will not operate correctly.
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to
the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower
than the preset level.
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is
also activated automatically. On the other hand,
Network-Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated
without deactivating Alternative Frequency
Reception. (See page 14.)
Continued on the next page
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files which are not based upon Windows
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
Media Audio.
®
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
Changing the source
• If you change the source, playback also stops
(without ejecting the disc).
Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,
disc play starts from where it has been stopped
previously.
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 128 characters
General settings—PSM
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
– Joliet: up to 64 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files,
200 folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Store stations manually.
Connect the aerial firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped. • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you
used for recording.
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately on
the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
Continued on the next page
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file
names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks are not played back in the order you
have intended.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),
album name). numbers, and a limited number of symbols.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
CD PLAYER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Type:
Compact disc player
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Signal Detection
System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Dynamic Range:
93 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
12 dB at 100 Hz
12 dB at 10 kHz
Max. Bit Rate:
320 kbps
Treble:
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
Max. Bit Rate:
192 kbps
Line-Out Level/
Impedance:
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Other Terminal:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
Grounding System:
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C
Temperature:
FM:
AM:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)
MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz
Installation Size:
Panel Size:
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
Mass:
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting
Sensitivity:
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Alternate Channel
65 dB
Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
30 dB
MW Tuner
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
LW Tuner
Sensitivity:
50 μV
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?
Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück
Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts
Затруднения при эксплуатации?
Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство
Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства обратитесь на
соответствующую страницу
Dear Customer,
Уважаемый клиент.
This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European
directives and standards regarding electromagnetic
compatibility and electrical safety.
Данное устройство соответствует действительным
Европейским директивам и стандартам по электромагнитной
совместимости и электрической безопасности.
European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited
is:
Представительство компании Victor Company of Japan,
Limited в Европе:
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
Germany
Германия
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien
und Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit
und elektrischer Sicherheit überein.
Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,
Limited ist:
JVC Technology Centre Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 52
61145 Friedberg
Deutschland
EN, GE, RU
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0807DTSMDTJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KD-G343/KD-G342/KD-G341
Installation/Connection Manual
Einbau/Anschlußanleitung
Руководство по установке/подключению
0807DTSMDTJEIN
EN, GE, RU
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
GET0484-013A
[EY]
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
РУССКИЙ
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground
electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a
voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR
ENTERTAINMENT dealers.
Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V
Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В
Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш
über diese Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC
Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.
автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор
напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера
автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ
Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем
Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и
осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.
• После установки обязательно заземлите данное
устройство на шасси автомобиля.
WARNINGS
WARNUNGEN
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the
Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, daß Sie den
battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse
installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.
herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird.
• Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau a Chassis des
Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.
Примечания:
Notes:
Hinweise:
• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем
указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком
часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.
• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной
мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели
устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если
максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в
режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.
ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 15).
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows
frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum
• Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen.
Brennt die Sicherung häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC
Autoradiohändler.
power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an • Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von
impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,
change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being
damaged (see page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS).
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads
with insulating tape.
mehr als 50 W anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit
einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die Maximalleistung
weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen Sie „AMP GAIN“ anders ein, um
Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 15 der
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).
• Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте
НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.
• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.
Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it
when removing this unit.
• Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlußklemmen
der NICHT VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband
umwickeln.
• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau
des Geräts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.
Heat sink
Abstrahlblech
Радиатор
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen
connections: der Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher:
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и
подключению громкоговорителей:
• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels NICHT an der
• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к
аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет
повреждено.
• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей
к кабелю питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему
соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.
car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.
• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the
speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.
Autobatterie anschließen, da sonst das Gerät schwer
beschädigt wird.
• VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen des
Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die Lautsprecher, die
Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem Auto überprüfen.
Parts list for installation and connection
The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert.
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately. Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an Ihren JVC-
Autoradiohändler.
Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß
Список деталей для установки и
подключения
Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.
При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с
дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.
A
B
C
Control panel
Schalttafel
Панель управления
Sleeve
Halterung
Муфта
Trim plate
Frontrahmen
Декоративную панель
D
E
F
Power cord
Stromkable
Кабель питания
Washer (ø5)
Unterlegscheibe (ø5)
Шайба (њ5)
Lock nut (M5)
Sicherungsmutter (M5)
Фиксирующая гайка (M5)
G
H
I
Mounting bolt (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)
Befestigungsschraube (M4 × 5 mm; M5 × 15 mm)
Крепежный болт (M4 × 5 мм; M5 × 15 мм)
Rubber cushion
Gummipuffer
Резиновый чехол
Handles
Griffe
Рычаги
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLATION
EINBAU
УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В
ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)
На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.
Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки,
обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста
JVC или в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие
принадлежности.
(IN-DASH MOUNTING)
(IM ARMATURENBRETT)
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have
any questions or require information regarding installation kits,
consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company
supplying kits.
Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei
irgendwelchen Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich
des Einbausatzes brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC
Autoradiohändler oder ein Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed vertreibt.
by a qualified technician.
• Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen • Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это
Sie es von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen. устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.
Do the required electrical connections.
Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen
Anschlüsse vor.
Выполните необходимые подключения
контактов, как показано на оборотной
стороне этой инструкции.
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
sleeve firmly in place.
Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die
Manschette sicher festzuhalten.
Отогните соответствующие
фиксаторы, предназначенные для
прочной установки корпуса.
Removing the unit
Ausbau des Geräts
Удаление устройства
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil freigeben.
Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.
Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so
that the unit can be removed.
Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen wie
in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät entfernt
werden kann.
Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их, как
показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.
When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden der Anker- When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne
Option / При использовании дополнительной стойки
Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Zum Beispiel in einem Toyota zuerst das Autoradio ausbauen und dann das Gerät an seinem Platz einbauen.
В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство
на место.
Stay (option)
Anker (Option)
Стойка
(дополнительно)
Fire wall
Feuerwand
Стена
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2
Dashboard
Armaturenbrett
Приборная панель
Bracket*2
Konsole*2
Кронштейн*2
Screw (option)
Schraube (Option)
Винт (дополнительно)
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*2
Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*2
Pocket
Taschen
Карман
Bracket*2
Konsole*2
Кронштейн*2
Note
: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer
screws are used, they could damage the unit.
Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.
Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von
weniger als 30˚ auf.
Hinweis
: Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden.
Werden längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.
Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм.
Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.
При использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.
1
2
1
2
1
*
*
When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.
Not supplied for this unit.
*
*
Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß die Sicherung auf der
Rückseite nicht beschädigt wird.
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.
*
Устанавливайте устройство таким образом, чтобы не повредить
предохранитель, расположенный сзади.
Hе входит в комплект поставки.
2
*
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
РУССКИЙ
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE
ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ
Typical Connections / Typische Anschlüsse / Типичные подключения
A
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.
Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgfältig
Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте
проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может
привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.
Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.
überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät
The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car hervorrufen.
body may be different in color.
Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова
können sich farblich unterscheiden.
автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order
1 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в
1 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge anschließen,
specified in the illustration below.
указанном ниже порядке.
wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.
2 Подключите кабель антенны.
2 Connect the aerial cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
2 Das Antennenkabel anschließen.
3 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.
3 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к
устройству.
Note: If your vehicle does not have any accessory terminal, move
the fuse from the fuse position 1 (initial position) to fuse position 2,
and connect the red lead (A7) to the positive (+) battery terminal.
• The yellow lead (A4) is not used in this case.
Hinweis: Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht über eine
Примечание: Если в Вашем автомобиле никакого
вспомогательного разъема не имеется, переставьте
предохранитель из положения 1 предохранителя
(первоначальное положение) в положение 2 предохранителя
и подключите красный провод (А7) к положительному (+)
полюсу аккумулятора.
Zubehöranschlußklemme, die Sicherung von der 1. Sicherungsposition
(Erstposition) in die 2. Sicherungsposition versetzen, die rote Leitung
(A7) an der (+) Batterieanschlußklemme anschließen.
• Die gelbe Leitung (A4) wird in diesem Fall nicht verwendet.
• Желтый провод (А4) в этом случае не используется.
Line out (see diagram
Schutz kappen Signalausgang
(siehe Schaltplan
)
15 A fuse
15 A Sicherung
Предохранитель 15 A
)
К выходу (см. схему
)
Fuse position 2 / 2. Sicherungsposition /
Положение 2 предохранителя
Fuse position 1 / 1. Sicherungsposition /
Положение 1 предохранителя
Aerial terminal
Antennen-
anschlußklemme
Разъем антенны
Rear ground terminal
Hintere Erdungsc-anschlußklemme
Задний разъем заземления
Ignition switch
Zündschalter
Переключатель зажигания
Black
Schwarz
Черный
To the metallic body or chassis of the car
Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos
К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля
Yellow*2
Gelb*2
To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the
ignition switch) (constant 12 V)
Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum Anschließen
an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)
К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)
(постоянный 12 В)
Желтый*2
Fuse block
Sicherungsblock
Блок предохранителя
Red
Rot
Красный
To an accessory terminal in the fuse block
Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock
К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя
Blue with white stripe
Blau mit weißem Streifen
Синий с белой полосой
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden
(max. 200 mA)
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)
Brown
Braun
Коричневый
To cellular phone system
Zur Mobiltelefon
К системе сотового телефона
White with black stripe
Weiß mit schwarzem
Streifen
Белый с черной
полосой
White
Weiß
Белый
Gray with black stripe
Grau mit schwarzem
Streifen
Серый с черной
полосой
Gray
Green with black stripe
Grün mit schwarzem
Streifen
Зеленый с черной
полосой
Green
Purple with black stripe
Lila mit schwarzem
Streifen
Пурпурный с черной
полосой
Purple
Grau
Grün
Lila
Серый
Зеленый
Пурпурный
Left speaker (front)
Right speaker (front)
Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)
Правый громкоговоритель
(передний)
Left speaker (rear)
Right speaker (rear)
Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)
Правый громкоговоритель
(задний)
Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)
Левый громкоговоритель
(передний)
Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)
Левый громкоговоритель
(задний)
1
1
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this
lead must be connected; otherwise, the power cannot be turned on.
*
*
Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.
*
*
Не входит в комплект поставки.
Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот провод,
иначе питание не включится.
2
2
2
Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts vor dem
Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst die
Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
Connecting the external amplifier / Anschließen des externen Verstärkers / Подключение внешнего усилителя
You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.
• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote
lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through
this unit.
• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the
amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.
Sie können einen Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage zu
erweitern.
• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit weißem Streifen) an
das Fernbedienungskabel des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses
Gerät gesteuert werden kann.
• Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät abtrennen und am
Verstärker anschließen. Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses
Geräts unbenutzt lassen.
Можно подключить усилитель для обновления автомобильной
стереосистемы.
• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с
белой полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого
оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого
устройства.
• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного
устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте
провода громкоговорителей данного устройства
неиспользованными.
Remote lead
Fernbedienungsleitung
Провод внешнего устройства
Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)
Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Fernbedienungsleitung (blau mit weißem Streifen)
Провод внешнего устройства (cиний с белой полосой)
To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any
Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden
К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны
Rear speakers
Hintere Lautsprecher
Задние
громкоговорители
JVC Amplifier
JVC Verstärker
JVC-усилитель
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)
Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)
Front speakers
Vordere Lautsprecher
Передние громкоговорители
3
3
3
*
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis
of the car—to the place not coated with paint (if coated with paint,
remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause
damage to the unit.
*
Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie oder dem Rahmen
des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die
Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor
Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß
angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.
*
Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому
кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской
(если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как
прикреплять провод). Невыполнение этого требования может
привести к повреждению данного устройства.
BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ
• Сработал предохранитель.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
FEHLERSUCHE
• Die Sicherung brennt durch.
* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen?
• Питание не включается.
• Power cannot be turned on.
• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden.
* Подключен ли желтый провод?
* Is the yellow lead connected?
* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?
• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.
* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода
громкоговорителей?
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.
*
Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?
• Sound is distorted.
• Ton verzerrt.
• Звук искажен.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher
zusammen geerdet?
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)
громкоговорителей?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using
shorter and thicker cords?
• Störgeräusche im Klang.
* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren und dickeren Kabeln an
das Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen?
• Шум мешает звучанию.
* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси
автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Gerät wird heiß.
• Устройство нагревается.
* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?
* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher
zusammen geerdet?
* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?
* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)
громкоговорителей?
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt nicht.
• Приемник не работает.
* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?
* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
KD-G347
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with
symbol).
0907DTSMDTJEIN
GET0491-001A
[EE]
EN
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ENGLISH
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified
service personnel.
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,
etc.).
Basic operations
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc
play will start from where it had been stopped previously
next time you turn on the power.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
Tuner operations
• During SSM search...
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be
automatically tuned in.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for
MP3 files and for WMA files
[European Union only]
For safety...
Warning
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly.
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to the
preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower than the
preset level.
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is also
activated automatically. On the other hand, Network-
Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated without
deactivating Alternative Frequency Reception.
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other
characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
Caution on volume setting
Temperature inside the car...
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,
Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level
2: up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 128 characters;
Joliet: up to 64 characters; Windows long file name: up
to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200 folders,
and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit
rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after
performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in: MP3i and MP3 PRO format, in an
inappropriate format, layer 1/2.
PREPARATIONS
How to reset your unit
Detaching the control panel
Reset the unit after installation is complete.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the
use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may
not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD
(CD-DA) and MP3/WMA formats.
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
Attaching the control panel
How to forcibly eject a disc
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-
protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this
unit:
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside
the unit.
Basic settings
Enter PSM menu.
Select an item.
1 Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2 Setting the clock
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
MAINTENANCE
How to clean the connectors
Wipe the connectors with
a cotton swab or cloth
To keep discs clean
Adjust.
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or
benzene.
Finish
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or
“12H” (hour).
moistened with alcohol.
Connectors
Moisture condensation
To play new discs
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until
the moisture has evaporated.
Remove any rough areas from the inner and
outer edges of the disc.
Available characters on the display
Available characters
Display indications
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
Unusual shape
1– EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS
Basic operations
Radio operations
Control panel
Check the current clock time/other information.
See also “CLK DISP“ of “General settings—PSM.”
Note:
• Turn on the power.
• Turn off the power [Hold].
• Attenuate the sound (if the
power is on).
FM1 and FM2:
87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz
FM3:
65.00 MHz – 74.00 MHz
Select preset station.
Detach the panel.
Select “FM/AM.”
Select the source.
Volume control.
Select the bands.
*You cannot select “CD” as the playback
source if there is no disc in the unit.
Search for a station—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.
Display window
• MO: Lights up in monaural mode.
• ST: Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
Playback mode / item indicator
Disc indicator
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.
• MO indicator lights up.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure.
Disc information indicators
Tr (track) indicator
LOUD (loudness) indicator
RDS indicators
EQ (equalizer) indicator
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)
You can preset six stations for each band.
• Source display
• Track number
• Folder number
• Volume level indicator
• Time countdown indicator
Main display (time,
playback information) indicator
Sound mode (c-EQ: custom equalizer)
Manual presetting
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.
Disc operations
Eject disc.
• Press SRC to
listen to another
playback source.
FM RDS operations
Storing your favourite programme type
You can store six favourite programme types.
Searching for your favourite FM RDS
programme
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favourite
programme by searching for a PTY code.
• 4 / ¢
[Press] Select track (for CD) or folder* number
Preset programme types in the number buttons (1 to 6):
[Press] Go to the next or previous track.
[Hold] Fast-forwards or reverses the track.
• 5 / ∞ : Go to the next or previous folder (for
MP3/WMA discs).
(01 – 06).
[Hold] Select track (for CD) or folder* number
(07 – 12).
* Folders are required to assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning.
The last selected PTY code
appears.
Example: Storing “ROCK M” into preset number 4.
Select a PTY code.
Turn on the power.
Insert disc.
Select one of your favourite programme
types or a PTY code.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
or
Selecting the playback modes
Changing the display information
After pressing M MODE, press the following buttons to...
If there is a station broadcasting a
programme of the same PTY code
as you have selected, that station is
tuned in.
TRK RPT : Plays the current track
repeatedly.
FLDR RPT* : Plays all tracks of the current
folder repeatedly.
Finish.
While playing an audio While playing an MP3 or
CD or CD Text
a WMA disc
RPT OFF : Cancels.
A = B = Disc title/
performer*1 = Track
title*1 = (back to the
beginning)
A = B = Album name/
performer (folder name*2)
= Track title (file name*2)
= (back to the beginning)
FLDR RND* : Plays all tracks of the current
folder, then the tracks of the
next folder at random.
Standby receptions
Tracing the same programme —
TA Standby Reception
Network-Tracking Reception
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any
source other than AM.
When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly
broadcasting the same programme with stronger signals.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see “General settings—PSM.”
ALL RND : Plays all tracks of the current
disc at random.
RND OFF : Cancels.
A
: The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
: Clock with the current track number
B
To activate/deactivate
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby
Reception is not yet activated.
To activate TA Standby Reception,
tune in to another station providing
RDS signals required for TA Standby
Reception.
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have tags or “TAG DISP” is
set to “TAG OFF,” folder name and file name appear.
2
Skipping a track quickly during play
• For MP3/WMA disc, you can skip a track within the
same folder.
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency
areas (01 – 05)
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
Example: Select track 32
PTY Standby Reception
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to your favourite PTY programme from any
source other than AM.
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
To activate and select your favourite PTY code for
PTY Standby Reception, see “General settings—PSM.”
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is
not yet activated.
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to
another station providing these signals.
External component operations
Automatic station selection —
Programme Search
You can connect an external component to the AUX (auxiliary) input
jack on the control panel.
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset
station is tuned in.
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF data,
tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the same
programme as the original preset station is broadcasting.
PTY codes
Turn on the connected
component and start
playing the source.
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT
Stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
Portable audio player,
etc.
2 – EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETTINGS
TROUBLESHOOTING
Sound adjustments
BAS*1 (bass)
Adjust the bass.
TRE*1 (treble)
Adjust the treble.
FAD*2 (fader)
Adjust the front and rear speaker
balance.
–06 to +06
–06 to +06
R06 to F06
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• This unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Connect the aerial firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
Preset values
Indication (For)
BAS TRE LOUD
BAL (balance)
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
L06 to R06
USER (Flat sound)
00 00 OFF
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used
for recording.
1
ROCK (Rock or disco music)
CLASSIC (Classical music)
POPS (Light music)
+03 +01ON
LOUD* (loudness)
LOUD ON or
LOUD OFF
Boost low and high frequencies to
produce a well-balanced sound at a low
volume level.
+01–02 OFF
+04 +01OFF
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc.
• Eject the disc forcibly.
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)
JAZZ (Jazz music)
+02 00 ON
+02 +03 OFF
VOL (volume)
Adjust the volume.
00 to 50
(or 00 to 30)*3
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
BAS: Bass; TRE: Treble; LOUD: (loudness)
1
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently
selected sound mode (c-EQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level
to “00.”
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately
on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
Adjusting the sound
2
3
*
*
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
General settings—PSM
• A longer readout time is required
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
Enter PSM menu.
Select an item.
Adjust.
Finish.
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
have intended.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the
tracks are recorded on the disc.
Indication
Item ( : Initial)
• DEMO ON
Setting
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a
limited number of symbols.
DEMO
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds.
Cancels.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
• DEMO OFF
• ON
:
:
CLK DISP*1
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is
turned off.
• OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds
when the power is turned off.
SPECIFICATIONS
CLOCK H (Hour)
CLOCK M (Minute)
24H/12H
0 – 23 (1 – 12)
00 – 59
:
:
:
[Initial: 0 (0:00)]
[Initial: 00 (0:00)]
See “Basic settings.”
CD player section
Audio amplifier section
Maximum Power Output:
Type:
Compact disc player
• 24H
• 12H
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
CLK ADJ*2
AF-REG*2
• AUTO
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock time)
data in the RDS signal.
Cancels.
Number of channels:
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
• OFF
• AF
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit switches
to another station (the programme may differ from the one currently
received).
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:
98 dB
Less than measurable limit
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
4
Ω
(4
Bass:
Treble:
Ω
to 8 allowance)
Ω
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
12 dB at 100 Hz
12 dB at 10 kHz
• The AF indicator lights up.
• AF REG
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit switches to
another station broadcasting the same programme.
• The AF and REG indicators light up.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding Format:
Frequency Response:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Other Terminal:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
70 dB
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
®
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
• OFF
Cancels.
General
PTY-STBY*2
TA VOL*2
OFF, PTY codes
Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes.
Tuner section
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Frequency Range:
VOL 00 – VOL 50 (or [Initial: VOL 15]
VOL 00 – VOL 30)*3
Grounding System:
FM1/2: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
Allowable Operating Temperature: 0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Installation Size (approx.):
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
Panel Size (approx.):
FM3:
AM:
65.00 MHz to 74.00 MHz
MV: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz
P-SEARCH*2
DIMMER
TEL
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Activates Programme Search.
Cancels.
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
[FM Tuner]
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 30 dB
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm
Mass (approx.):
• MUTING 1/
MUTING 2
• OFF
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular phone.
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
:
Cancels.
SCROLL*4
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
[MW Tuner]
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
[MW Tuner]
Sensitivity: 50 μV
AUX ADJ
A.ADJ 00
– A.ADJ 05
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source from external component
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
TAG DISP
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the tag while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
• LOW PWR
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less
than 50 W to prevent the speaker from being damaged.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
• HIGH PWR
• AUTO
:
:
IF BAND
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noise between
close stations. (The stereo effect may be lost.)
• WIDE
:
Subject to the interference noise from adjacent stations, but the sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select “OFF” to
save the car’s battery.
Only for FM RDS stations.
Depends on the amplifier gain control.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
2
3
4
*
*
*
3 – EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,
which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealers.
INSTALLATION
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation
kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
In dash-mounting
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical
connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Notes:
When you stand the unit, be careful not
to damage the fuse on the rear.
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front,
with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the
speakers from being damaged (see “General settings—PSM”).
Do the required electrical
connections.
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this
unit.
Heat sink
Bend the appropriate tabs
to hold the sleeve firmly in
place.
Parts list for installation and connection
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
A/B
C
D
Control panel/
Hard case
Sleeve
Trim plate
G
E
F
Lock nut (M5)
Power cord
Washer (ø5)
J
I
H
Handles
Rubber cushion
Mounting bolt
(M4 × 5 mm ; M5 × 15 mm)
When using the optional stay
Stay (option)
Fire wall
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Dashboard
Typical connections
Screw (option)
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Install the unit at an angle of less
than 30˚.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the aerial cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
When installing the unit without using the sleeve
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Note: If your vehicle does not have any accessory terminal, move the fuse from the fuse position 1 (initial position) to
fuse position 2, and connect the red lead (A7) to the positive (+) battery terminal.
• The yellow lead (A4) is not used in this case.
* Not supplied for this unit.
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*
Bracket*
15 A fuse
Fuse position 2
Flat type screws (M5
× 8 mm)*
Fuse position 1
Aerial
terminal
Pocket
Bracket*
Rear ground terminal
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections
Ignition switch
Black
To the metallic body or
chassis of the car
Connect only the front speakers if your
speaker system is two-speaker system.
To a live terminal in the
fuse block connecting to the
car battery (bypassing the
ignition switch) (constant
12 V)
White with black stripe
Yellow *2
Front speaker
(left)
White
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fuse block
Gray with black stripe
• The fuse blows.
Red
To an accessory terminal in
the fuse block
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
Front speaker
(right)
Gray
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
Blue with white
stripe
Green with black stripe
To the remote lead of other equipment or
power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Rear speaker
(left)
Green
Brown
To cellular phone system
Purple with black stripe
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this
lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be turned on.
Rear speaker
(right)
Purple
2
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
4 – EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD RECEIVER
KD-G396S
For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.
INSTRUCTIONS
GET0554-001A
[UI]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
How to reset your unit
[European Union only]
Warning:
• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be
sure to look around carefully or you may be involved
in a traffic accident.
How to forcibly eject a disc
Caution on volume setting:
Discs produce very little noise compared with other
sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc
to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden
increase of the output level.
• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
• If this does not work, reset your unit.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to use the M MODE button
CONTENTS
If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions mode,
then the number buttons and 5/∞ buttons will work
as different function buttons.
Control panel ..................................
Remote controller — RM-RK50...........
4
5
Ex.: When number button 2 works as
MO (monaural) button.
Getting started................................
Basic operations...................................................
6
6
Radio operations .............................
7
Disc operations................................
Playing a disc in the unit .....................................
8
8
To use these buttons for their original functions
again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds
without pressing any of these buttons until the
functions mode is cleared, or press M MODE again.
Sound adjustments.......................... 10
Other external component
operations ................................... 11
General settings — PSM .................. 11
Maintenance ................................... 13
More about this unit ........................ 14
Troubleshooting.............................. 16
Specifications.................................. 17
Detaching the control panel
For safety...
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will
block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
Attaching the control panel
Temperature inside the car...
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel
Parts identification
Display window
1 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons
2 0 (eject) button
;
a
s
RND (random) button
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
Disc information indicators—
3
(standby/on attenuator) button
4
Remote sensor
TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)
DISC indicator
Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),
DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light
(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).
Loading slot
Display window
EQ (equalizer) button
DISP (display) button
(control panel release) button
SRC (source) button
d
f
5
6
7
8
9
p
(disc),
(folder), RPT (repeat)
g
Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),
ST (stereo)
LOUD (loudness) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
Tr (track) indicator
Source display / Track number / Folder number /
Volume level indicator / Time countdown indicator
Main display
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,
USER
h
j
k
l
q 4 / ¢ buttons
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
Control dial
BAND button
SEL (select) button
M MODE button
MO (monaural) button
SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button
Number buttons
/
z
RPT (repeat) button
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main elements and features
Remote controller —
RM-RK50
Installing the lithium coin battery
(CR2025)
Aim the remote controller directly at the remote
sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle
in between.
1
(standby/on/attenuator) button
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when the power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
Warning:
2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.
VOL – / VOL + buttons
• Adjusts the volume level.
SOUND button
• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent
equalizer).
SOURCE button
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or
its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.
• Do not leave the remote controller in a place
(such as the dashboard) exposed to direct
sunlight for a long time; otherwise, it may
explode.
• Store the battery in a place where children
cannot reach to avoid the risk of accidents.
• To prevent the battery from over-heating,
cracking, or starting a fire:
– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the
battery, or dispose of it in a fire.
– Do not leave the battery with other metallic
materials.
– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar
tools.
3
4
5
• Selects the source.
6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and
held.
• Changes the track if pressed briefly.
– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when
throwing away or saving it.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic settings
Getting started
• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and
12.
Basic operations
~ Turn on the power.
1
2
Ÿ
1 Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2 Setting the clock
* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if
there is no disc in the unit.
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
! For FM/AM tuner
3
Finish the procedure.
⁄ Adjust the volume.
To check the current clock time while the
power is turned off
Volume level appears.
Clock time is shown on the display for
about 5 seconds. See also page 12.
@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 10.)
To drop the volume in a
moment (ATT)
To restore the sound, press the
button again.
To turn off the power
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing stations in memory
Radio operations
You can preset six stations for each band.
~
Ÿ
FM station automatic presetting—
SSM (Strong-station Sequential
Memory)
Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
1
Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to
store into.
2
3
! Start searching for a station.
When a station is received,
searching stops.
To stop searching, press the
same button again.
“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic
presetting is over.
To tune in to a station manually
In step ! above...
1
Local FM stations with the strongest signals are
searched and stored automatically in the FM band.
Manual presetting
Ex.: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset
number 4 of the FM1 band.
2
Select a desired station frequency.
1
2
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive
3
Lights up when monaural mode is activated.
Preset number flashes for a while.
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same
procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator
goes off.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fast-forward or reverse the track
To go to the next or previous track
Listening to a preset station
1
2
Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.
or
To go to the next or previous folder (for MP3/
WMA discs)
To check the other information while
listening to an FM or AM station
To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder
(for MP3/WMA discs) directly
Clock Ô Frequency
To select a number from 01 – 06:
Disc operations
To select a number from 07 – 12:
Playing a disc in the unit
~ Turn on the power.
• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it
is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning of their folder names—
01, 02, 03, and so on.
Ÿ
To select a particular track in a folder
(for MP3/WMA disc):
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you
change the source or eject the disc.
To stop play and eject the disc
• Press SRC to listen to another
playback source.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While playing an MP3 or a WMA track
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”
Other main functions
(see page 12)
Skipping tracks quickly during play
• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks within the
same folder
Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks whose
number is a single digit (1 to 9)
A = Album name/performer (folder
name*2) [
name*2) [
beginning)
] = Track title (file
] = B = (back to the
1
• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”
A = Folder name [ ] = File name
2
[
] = B = (back to the beginning)
A
B
:
:
Clock with the current track number
The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
Each time you press the button, you can skip 10
tracks.
• After the last track, the first track will be selected
and vice versa.
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the display
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,
folder name and file name appear. In this case, the
TAG indicator will not light up.
3
2
Prohibiting disc ejection
Selecting the playback modes
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
You can use only one of the following playback modes
at a time.
1
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same
procedure.
2
Select your desired playback mode.
Repeat play
7
Changing the display information
Mode
Plays repeatedly
TRK RPT
FLDR RPT *
:
:
The current track. [
All tracks of the current folder.
]
[
]
While playing an audio CD or CD Text
RPT OFF
:
Cancels.
A = Disc title/performer*1 = Track
title*1 [ ] = B = (back to the beginning)
Continued on the next page
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Random play
Adjusting the sound
You can adjust the sound characteristics to your
preference.
Mode Plays at random
FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,
then the tracks of the next folder
1
2
and so on. [
]
ALL RND
RND OFF
:
:
All tracks of the current disc.
[
]
Cancels.
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.
[ ] : Corresponding indicator lights up on the
display
Indication, [Range]
BAS *1 (bass), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the bass.
Sound adjustments
You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the
MID *1 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.
music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
TRE *1 (treble), [–06 to +06]
Adjust the treble.
FAD *2 (fader), [R06 to F06]
Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.
Preset values
BAS MID TRE LOUD
Indication (For)
BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]
USER
(Flat sound)
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
00
00
00
OFF
LOUD *3 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]
Boost low and high frequencies to produce a
well-balanced sound at a low volume level.
ROCK
(Rock or disco music)
+03 00 +02 OFF
+01 00 +03 OFF
+02 +01 +02 OFF
+04 –02 +01 OFF
+03 00 +03 OFF
CLASSIC
(Classical music)
VOL (volume), [00 to 50 or 00 to 30] *4
Adjust the volume.
POPS
(Light music)
1
*
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently
selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader
level to “00.”
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be
applied to all sound modes.
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See
page 12 for details.)
HIP HOP
(Funk or rap music)
2
3
4
*
*
*
JAZZ
(Jazz music)
BAS: Bass; MID: Mid-range; TRE: Treble; LOUD: Loudness
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other external component
operations
General settings — PSM
You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items
listed in the table on page 12.
You can connect an external component to the
AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the control panel.
1
2
3
Select a PSM item.
Portable audio player, etc
Adjust the PSM item selected.
Stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
~
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM
items if necessary.
Ÿ Turn on the connected component and
start playing the source.
! Adjust the volume.
Finish the procedure.
⁄ Adjust the sound as you want. (See
page 10.)
To check the other information while
listening to an external component
Clock Ô AUX IN
Continued on the next page
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indications
Item
Selectable settings, [reference page]
(
: Initial)
DEMO
Display demonstration
• DEMO ON
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].
Cancels.
• DEMO OFF
• ON
:
:
CLK DISP *1
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power
Clock display
is turned off.
• OFF
: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds
when the power is turned off, [6].
CLOCK H
Hour adjustment
1 – 12
00 – 59
[Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]
CLOCK M
[Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]
Minute adjustment
DIMMER
Dimmer
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
SCROLL *2
Scroll
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
AUX ADJ
Auxiliary input level
adjustment
A.ADJ 00
– A.ADJ 05
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source from external component
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
TAG DISP
Tag display
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
Amplifier gain control
• LOW PWR
• HIGH PWR
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the speaker
is less than 50 W to avoid damaging the speaker.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
1
*
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF”
that you save the car’s battery.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
2
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To keep discs clean
Maintenance
How to clean the connectors
Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.
To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the
connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with
alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.
A dirty disc may not play correctly.
If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with
a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
• Do not use any solvents (for example, conventional
record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean
discs.
To play new discs
New discs may have some rough spots
around the inner and outer edges. If
such a disc is used, this unit may reject
the disc.
Connectors
To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a
pencil or ball-point pen, etc.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in
the following cases:
• After starting the heater in the car.
• If it becomes very humid inside the car.
Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this
case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a
few hours until the moisture has evaporated.
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
How to handle discs
Sticker and
sticker residue
Stick-on label
When removing a disc from its
case, press down the center holder
of the case and lift the disc out,
holding it by the edges.
• Always hold the disc by the edges. Do not touch its
recording surface.
Center holder
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Unusual shape
When storing a disc in its case, gently insert the
disc around the center holder (with the printed surface
facing up).
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
• Make sure to store discs in cases after use.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are
used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”
• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or
WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.
More about this unit
Basic operations
Turning on the power
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can only play back files of the same type as
those which are detected first if a disc includes both
audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on
this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for
the following reasons:
Turning off the power
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc,
disc play will start from where it had been stopped
previously next time you turn on the power.
Tuner operations
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
Storing stations in memory
• During SSM search...
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens
inside the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing
data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,
warped, etc.).
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will
be automatically tuned in.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular
CDs.
• When storing a station manually, the previously
preset station is erased when a new station is stored
in the same preset number.
• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:
– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck
to the surface.
– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an
ink jet printer.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Using these discs under high temperature or high
humidity may cause malfunctions or damage to the
unit.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce
CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs
(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA) formats. This unit
can also play back CD-Rs/CD-RWs in MP3/WMA
formats.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
Changing the source
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of
the letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or
2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.
• If you change the source, playback also stops
(without ejecting the disc).
Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,
disc play starts from where it has been stopped
previously.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No
other characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder
names vary depending on the disc format used
(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or
<.wma>).
Ejecting a disc
• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,
it is automatically inserted into the loading slot again
to protect it from dust.
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you
cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another
disc or press SRC to select another playback source.
General settings—PSM
• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from
“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level
is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically
changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters
– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters
– Romeo: up to 64 characters
Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
– Joliet: up to 32 characters
– Windows long file name: up to 126 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 200
folders, and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable
bit rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the
elapsed time display, and do not show the actual
elapsed time. In particular, this difference becomes
noticeable after performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in MP3i and MP3 PRO format.
– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.
– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.
– WMA files encoded in lossless, professional, and
voice format.
– WMA files not based on Windows Media® Audio.
– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers.
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit (see page 2).
Store stations manually.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
•
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you
used for recording.
• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).
• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on
the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format
compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or
Joliet.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file
names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA
tracks.)
• A longer readout time is required
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
• Tracks are not played back in the order you
have intended.
The playback order is determined when the files are
recorded.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by
how the tracks are recorded on the disc.
• The correct characters are not displayed (e.g. This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),
album name). numbers, and a limited number of symbols.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION
CD PLAYER SECTION
Maximum Power Output:
Type:
Compact disc player
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Signal Detection
System:
Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)
Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
Dynamic Range:
93 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
Bass:
4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)
Wow and Flutter:
Less than measurable limit
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
12 dB at 60 Hz
12 dB at 1 kHz
12 dB at 7.5 kHz
Max. Bit Rate:
320 kbps
Mid-range:
Treble:
WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:
Max. Bit Rate:
192 kbps
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB
GENERAL
Power Requirement:
Line-Out Level/
Impedance:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Output Impedance: 1 kΩ
Other Terminal:
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C
Temperature:
TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range:
FM:
Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
Installation Size:
Panel Size:
178 mm × 50 mm × 160 mm
AM:
178 mm × 50 mm × 17 mm
FM Tuner
Usable Sensitivity:
Mass:
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
50 dB Quieting
Sensitivity:
Alternate Channel
65 dB
Selectivity (400 kHz):
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation:
30 dB
AM Tuner
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Having TROUBLE with operation?
Please reset your unit
Refer to page of How to reset your unit
EN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
0308DTSMDTJEIN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
KD-S15
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with
symbol).
For customer Use:
Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which
are located on the top or bottom of the cabinet.
Retain this information for future reference.
0508DTSMDTJEIN
Model No.
Serial No.
GET0561-001A
[J]
EN
© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ESPAÑOL
ENGLISH
INFORMATION (For U.S.A.)
MAINTENANCE
How to clean the connectors
Wipe the connectors with
a cotton swab or cloth
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
To keep discs clean
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or
benzene.
moistened with alcohol.
Connectors
Moisture condensation
To play new discs
Remove any rough areas from the inner and
outer edges of the disc.
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until
the moisture has evaporated.
Caution
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Do not use the following discs:
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
Single CD—8 cm (3-3/16”) disc
Warped disc
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified
service personnel.
3. CAUTION: (For U.S.A.) Visible and/or invisible class II laser radiation when open. Do not stare into beam.
(For Canada) Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical
instruments.
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
Unusual shape
C-thru Disc (semi-transparent disc)
PREPARATIONS
[European Union only]
How to reset your unit
Detaching the control panel
Reset the unit after installation is complete.
For safety...
Warning
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
Attaching the control panel
Temperature inside the car...
Caution on volume setting
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
How to forcibly eject a disc
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
General
Basic operations
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD
(CD-DA).
• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you cannot
operate some of the buttons. Insert another disc or press
SRC to select another playback source.
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc
play will start from where it had been stopped previously
next time you turn on the power.
Basic settings
Enter PSM menu.
Cancel the display
demonstration
Set the clock
• When no disc is loaded in the unit, you cannot select “CD”
as the playback source.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this
unit:
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside
the unit.
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,
etc.).
Select an item.
Adjust.
Tuner operations
• During SSM search...
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be
automatically tuned in.
Adjust the hour.
Adjust the minute.
Deactivate the display
demonstration.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the
use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may
not be recommended.
Finish
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
1– EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS
Basic operations
Remote sensor
DO NOT expose to strong light.
Check the current clock time/other information.
See also “CLK DISP“ of “General settings—PSM.”
Control panel
Remote controller—RM-RK50
• Turn on the power.
• Turn off the power [Hold].
• Attenuate the sound (if the
power is on).
7 Installing battery
Warning: To prevent accidents and damage
• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or its
equivalent.
Lithium coin battery (CR2025)
• Store out of reach of children.
• Do not recharge, short, or dismantle.
• Do not dispose of in fire.
• Do not carry around with other metallic materials.
Detach the panel.
Select the source.
Volume control.
For USA-California Only: This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material—
special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Display window
7 Features
Playback mode / item indicator
• MO: Lights up in monaural mode.
• ST: Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or
attenuates the sound when power is on.
• Turns the power off if pressed and held.
• Selects the sound mode
(iEQ: intelligent equalizer).
Disc indicator
• Selects the source.
LOUD (loudness) indicator
EQ (equalizer) indicator
• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.
• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.
Tr (track) indicator
• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.
• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if
pressed and held.
• Source display
• Track number
• Volume level indicator
• Time countdown indicator
• Changes the track of the disc if pressed
briefly.
• Adjusts the volume level.
Main display (time,
playback information) indicator
Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)
Disc operations
Radio operations
Eject disc.
• Press SRC to
listen to another
playback source.
Select preset station.
• You can also use 5 / ∞ to select preset station.
• 4 / ¢
[Press] Go to the next or previous track.
[Hold] Fast-forwards or reverses the track.
[Press] Select track number (01 – 06).
[Hold] Select track number (07 – 12).
Select “FM/AM.”
Select the bands.
Turn on the power.
Insert disc.
Search for a station—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
Selecting the playback modes
Changing the display information
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.
• MO indicator lights up.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure.
After pressing M MODE, press the following buttons to...
TRK RPT : Plays the current track
repeatedly.
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)
You can preset six stations for each band.
RPT OFF : Cancels.
ALL RND : Plays all tracks of the current
disc at random.
: Clock with the current track number
: The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
RND OFF : Cancels.
Skipping a track quickly during play
Example: Select track 32
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
Manual presetting
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
External component operations
You can connect an external component to the AUX (auxiliary) input jack on the
control panel.
Turn on the connected
component and start
playing the source.
Portable audio player, etc.
Stereo mini plug (not supplied)
SETTINGS
LOUD*4 (loudness) : Boost low and high frequencies to LOUD ON or
produce a well-balanced sound at LOUD OFF
a low volume level.
Sound adjustments
Adjusting the sound
SUB.W (subwoofer)
VOL (volume)
:
Adjust the subwoofer output level. 00 to 08
Preset values
BAS
: Adjust the volume.
00 to 50
LOUD
(loudness)
MID
TRE
(or 00 to 30)*5
(bass) (mid-range) (treble)
Indication (For)
BAS*2 (bass)
MID*2 (mid-range) : Adjust the middle frequencies sound level. –06 to +06
: Adjust the bass.
–06 to +06
1
*
*
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”
USER (Flat sound)
00
00
00
00
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2
When you adjust the bass, mid-range, or treble, the adjustment you have made
is stored for the currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level to “00.”
The adjustment made (LOUD ON/LOUD OFF) will be applied to all sound modes
(iEQ).
ROCK (Rock or disco music)
CLASSIC (Classical music)
POPS (Light music)
+03
+01
+02
+04
+03
+02
+03
+02
+01
+03
TRE*2 (treble)
FAD*3 (fader)
BAL (balance)
: Adjust the treble.
–06 to +06
00
3
4
*
*
: Adjust the front and rear speaker balance. R06 to F06
: Adjust the left and right speaker balance. L06 to R06
+01
–02
00
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)
JAZZ (Jazz music)
5
*
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting.
See reverse page \
2 – EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General settings—PSM
SPECIFICATIONS
Enter PSM menu.
Select an item.
Adjust.
Finish
CD player section
Audio amplifier section
Type:
Compact disc player
Power Output:
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Number of channels:
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
20 W RMS × 4 Channels at 4
≤ 1% THD+N
Signal to Noise Ratio:
Ω
and
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
Indication
DEMO
Item ( : Initial) Setting
80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4
Ω
)
• DEMO ON
• DEMO OFF
• ON
:
:
:
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no operation is
done for about 20 seconds.
Cancels.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:
98 dB
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
4
Ω
(4
Bass:
Mid-range: 12 dB at 1 kHz
Treble: 12 dB at 7.5 kHz
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
load (full scale)
Ω
to 8
Ω
allowance)
Less than measurable limit
12 dB at 60 Hz
CLK DISP*1
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is turned
General
off.
Frequency Response:
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
• OFF
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds when the
power is turned off.
Line-Out Level/Impedance: 2.5 V/20 k
Output Impedance: 1 k
Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:
2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)
Ω
Ω
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature:
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Installation Size (approx.):
CLOCK H (Hour)
1 – 12
:
:
[Initial: 1 (1:00)]
[Initial: 00 (1:00)]
CLOCK M (Minute) 00 – 59
DIMMER
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
(7-3/16” × 2-1/16” × 6-5/16”)
Panel Size (approx.):
188 mm × 58 mm × 5 mm
(7-7/16” × 2-5/16” × 1/4”)
Mass (approx.):
Tuner section
Frequency Range:
SCROLL
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
(with channel interval set to 100 kHz or 200 kHz)
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)
AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless of
the setting.
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs) (excluding accessories)
(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)
531 kHz to 1 602 kHz
(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
L/O MODE
WOOFER*2
AUX ADJ
• REAR
:
:
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the speakers
(through an external amplifier).
Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a subwoofer.
• WOOFER
If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your telephone
directory for the nearest car audio speciality shop.
[FM Tuner]
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75
• LOW
• MID
• HIGH
:
:
:
Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
Ω
)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 35 dB
Ω)
Having TROUBLE with operation?
A.ADJ 00
– A.ADJ 05
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the output
level when changing the source from external component connected to the
AUX input jack on the control panel.
Please reset your unit
Still having trouble??
[AM Tuner]
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
Call 1-800-252-5722 (USA ONLY)
http://www.jvc.com
AMP GAIN*3
AREA
• LOW PWR
• HIGH PWR
• AREA US
• AREA EU
• AREA SA
:
:
:
:
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less than
50 W to prevent the speaker from being damaged.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
When using in North/Central/South America. AM/FM intervals are set to
10 kHz/200 kHz.
When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set to 9 kHz/50 kHz
(100 kHz during auto search).
When using in South American countries. AM/FM intervals are set to 10 kHz/
100kHz.
PREPARATION
You need the installation kits which corresponds to your car.
• Mark all the check boxes (
) to make sure you have follow the instructions and the listed parts.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select “OFF” to
save the car’s battery.
Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”
The volume level automatically changes to “VOL 30” if you change to “LOW PWR” while the volume level is set higher than
“VOL 30.”
Check the battery system in your car
2
3
*
*
12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground
TROUBLESHOOTING
Prepare this before installation
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• The buttons on the unit do not work as you If you press M MODE, some buttons work differently from it
intended.
original function. Wait for 5 seconds or press M MODE again.
TROUBLESHOOTING
• The fuse blows.
• This unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit.
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc ejects.
Connect the antenna firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used
for recording.
• Noise interfere with sounds.
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc.
• Eject the disc forcibly.
• This unit does not work at all.
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
* Have you reset your unit?
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately
on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
3 – EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts list for installation and connection
A
D
B
C
Control panel
Power cord
Sleeve
Trim plate
G
I
J
K
Mounting bolt—
M4 x 5 mm (M4 x 1/4");
M5 x 12.5 mm (M5 x 1/2")
E
F
H
Handles
Remote controller
Battery
Washer (ø5)
Lock nut (M5)
Rubber cushion
INSTALLATION
If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, consult your JVC car audio dealer.
In dash-mounting
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
When you stand the unit, be careful not to
damage the fuse on the rear.
Do the required electrical
connections.
Bend the appropriate tabs
to hold the sleeve firmly
in place.
When using the optional stay
When installing the unit without using the sleeve
Stay (option)
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Fire wall
* Not supplied for this unit.
Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*
Dashboard
Bracket*
Screw (option)
Flat type screws
—M5 × 8 mm (M5 × 3/8")*
Install the unit at an angle of
less than 30˚.
Pocket
Bracket*
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Make sure to disconnect the battery’s negative terminal.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
High
Note:
It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the
maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page “General setting — PSM“ of the INSTRUCTIONS.).
Heat sink
Typical connections
Rear ground terminal
Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer
Remote lead
Y-connector *1
Rear line out
Remote lead (blue with white stripe)
Antenna
terminal
Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR”
(See “General settings—PSM.”)
You can connect a power amplifier for
rear speakers.
15 A fuse
To the remote lead of other equipment
or automatic antenna if any
Ignition switch
Black
To the metallic body
or chassis of the car
Connect only the front speakers if your
speaker system is two-speaker system.
JVC Amplifier
Rear
speakers
To a live terminal in the
fuse block connecting to the
car battery (bypassing the
ignition switch) (constant
12 V)
White with black stripe
Right
Yellow *2
Front speakers
Left
Not supplied for this unit.
Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER”
(See “General settings—PSM.”)
You can also connect a subwoofer to
the REAR LINE OUT terminals.
Front speaker (left)
White
1
2
*
*
Fuse block
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this
lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be turned on.
Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis
of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint,
remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may
cause damage to the unit.
Gray with black stripe
Red
To an accessory terminal in
the fuse block
3
*
Front speaker (right) Gray
Green with black stripe
or
JVC Amplifier
Subwoofer
Blue with white
stripe
To the remote lead of other
equipment or automatic antenna if
any (200 mA max.)
4
*
Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)
Rear speaker (left)
Green
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections
Purple with black stripe
Rear speaker (right)
Purple
4 – EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.
Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best
possible performance from the unit.
KD-G347
CD RECEIVER: INSTRUCTIONS/INSTALLATION
Installation/connection are explained at the last section of this manual (reverse page, indicated with
symbol).
1207DTSMDTJEIN
GET0491-001B
[EE]
EN
© 2007 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
ENGLISH
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified
service personnel.
MORE ABOUT THIS UNIT
– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.
– The files on the CD-R/CD-RW are written using the
“Packet Write” method.
– There are improper recording conditions (missing data,
etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched, warped,
etc.).
Basic operations
• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn on the
power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.
• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc
play will start from where it had been stopped previously
next time you turn on the power.
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.
• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the
reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular CDs.
Tuner operations
• During SSM search...
Playing an MP3/WMA disc
– All previously stored stations are erased and the
stations are stored anew.
– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest
frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).
– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will be
automatically tuned in.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
• This unit can show the names of albums, artists
(performer), and tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for
MP3 files and for WMA files
[European Union only]
For safety...
Warning
• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will block
outside sounds, making driving dangerous.
• Stop the car before performing any complicated
operations.
If you need to operate the unit while driving, be sure to
look around carefully or you may be involved in a traffic
accident.
• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of
RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF
(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly.
• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby
Reception, the volume level automatically changes to the
preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower than the
preset level.
• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated
(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is also
activated automatically. On the other hand, Network-
Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated without
deactivating Alternative Frequency Reception.
• If you want to know more about RDS, visit
<http://www.rds.org.uk>.
• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No other
characters can be correctly displayed.
• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the
conditions below:
– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps
– Sampling frequency:
Caution on volume setting
Temperature inside the car...
Discs produce very little noise compared with other sources.
Lower the volume before playing a disc to avoid damaging
the speakers by the sudden increase of the output level.
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)
If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold
weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes
normal before operating the unit.
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)
– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo, Joliet,
Windows long file name
• The maximum number of characters for file/folder names
vary depending on the disc format used (includes 4
extension characters—<.mp3> or <.wma>).
– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters; ISO 9660 Level
2: up to 31 characters; Romeo: up to 128 characters;
Joliet: up to 64 characters; Windows long file name: up
to 128 characters
• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, 255 folders,
and 8 hierarchical levels.
• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable bit
rate).
Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in the elapsed
time display, and do not show the actual elapsed time.
In particular, this difference becomes noticeable after
performing the search function.
• This unit cannot play back the following files:
– MP3 files encoded in: MP3i and MP3 PRO format, in an
inappropriate format, layer 1/2.
PREPARATIONS
How to reset your unit
Detaching the control panel
Reset the unit after installation is complete.
Disc operations
Caution for DualDisc playback
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with
the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the
use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may
not be recommended.
General
• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD Texts,
and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD
(CD-DA) and MP3/WMA formats.
•
Your preset adjustments will also be erased.
Attaching the control panel
How to forcibly eject a disc
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW
– WMA files: encoded in lossless, professional, and voice
format; not based upon Windows Media® Audio; copy-
protected with DRM.
– Files which have data such as WAVE, ATRAC3, etc.
• The search function works but search speed is not
constant.
• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.
• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,
unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.
• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on this
unit:
•
•
Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.
If this does not work, reset your unit.
– Discs are dirty or scratched.
– Moisture condensation has occurred on the lens inside
the unit.
Basic settings
Enter PSM menu.
Select an item.
1 Canceling the display demonstrations
Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”
2 Setting the clock
Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.
Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the
minute.
MAINTENANCE
How to clean the connectors
Wipe the connectors with
a cotton swab or cloth
To keep discs clean
Adjust.
Wipe in a straight line from center of disc to
edge. Do not use liquid cleaners, thinners, or
benzene.
Finish
Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or
“12H” (hour).
moistened with alcohol.
Connectors
Moisture condensation
To play new discs
Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit. Eject
the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few hours until
the moisture has evaporated.
Remove any rough areas from the inner and
outer edges of the disc.
Available characters on the display
Available characters
Display indications
Do not use the following discs:
Single CD (8 cm disc)
Warped disc
Sticker and sticker residue
Stick-on label
C-thru Disc (semi-
transparent disc)
Transparent or semi-transparent
parts on its recording area
Unusual shape
1– EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPERATIONS
Basic operations
Radio operations
Control panel
Check the current clock time/other information.
See also “CLK DISP“ of “General settings—PSM.”
Note:
• Turn on the power.
• Turn off the power [Hold].
• Attenuate the sound (if the
power is on).
FM1 and FM2:
87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz
FM3:
65.00 MHz – 74.00 MHz
Select preset station.
Detach the panel.
Select “FM/AM.”
Select the source.
Volume control.
Select the bands.
*You cannot select “CD” as the playback
source if there is no disc in the unit.
Search for a station—Auto Search.
Manual Search: Hold either one of the buttons until “M” flashes on the display, then press it repeatedly.
Display window
• MO: Lights up in monaural mode.
• ST: Lights up when receiving an FM stereo
broadcast with sufficient signal strength.
Playback mode / item indicator
Disc indicator
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive
Reception improves, but the stereo effect will be lost.
• MO indicator lights up.
To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same procedure.
Disc information indicators
Tr (track) indicator
LOUD (loudness) indicator
RDS indicators
EQ (equalizer) indicator
FM station automatic presetting—SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)
You can preset six stations for each band.
• Source display
• Track number
• Folder number
• Volume level indicator
• Time countdown indicator
Main display (time,
playback information) indicator
Sound mode (c-EQ: custom equalizer)
Manual presetting
Example: Storing the FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number 4 of the FM1 band.
Disc operations
Eject disc.
• Press SRC to
listen to another
playback source.
FM RDS operations
Storing your favourite programme type
You can store six favourite programme types.
Searching for your favourite FM RDS
programme
You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favourite
programme by searching for a PTY code.
• 4 / ¢
[Press] Select track (for CD) or folder* number
Preset programme types in the number buttons (1 to 6):
[Press] Go to the next or previous track.
[Hold] Fast-forwards or reverses the track.
• 5 / ∞ : Go to the next or previous folder (for
MP3/WMA discs).
(01 – 06).
[Hold] Select track (for CD) or folder* number
(07 – 12).
* Folders are required to assigned with 2-digit
numbers at the beginning.
The last selected PTY code
appears.
Example: Storing “ROCK M” into preset number 4.
Select a PTY code.
Turn on the power.
Insert disc.
Select one of your favourite programme
types or a PTY code.
All tracks will be played repeatedly until you change the source or eject the disc.
or
Selecting the playback modes
Changing the display information
After pressing M MODE, press the following buttons to...
If there is a station broadcasting a
programme of the same PTY code
as you have selected, that station is
tuned in.
TRK RPT : Plays the current track
repeatedly.
FLDR RPT* : Plays all tracks of the current
folder repeatedly.
Finish.
While playing an audio While playing an MP3 or
CD or CD Text
a WMA disc
RPT OFF : Cancels.
A = B = Disc title/
performer*1 = Track
title*1 = (back to the
beginning)
A = B = Album name/
performer (folder name*2)
= Track title (file name*2)
= (back to the beginning)
FLDR RND* : Plays all tracks of the current
folder, then the tracks of the
next folder at random.
Standby receptions
Tracing the same programme —
TA Standby Reception
Network-Tracking Reception
TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any
source other than AM.
When driving in an area where FM reception is not
sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to
another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly
broadcasting the same programme with stronger signals.
To change the Network-Tracking Reception
setting, see “General settings—PSM.”
ALL RND : Plays all tracks of the current
disc at random.
RND OFF : Cancels.
A
: The elapsed playing time with the current track
number
: Clock with the current track number
B
To activate/deactivate
* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.
• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby
Reception is not yet activated.
To activate TA Standby Reception,
tune in to another station providing
RDS signals required for TA Standby
Reception.
1
*
*
If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.
If an MP3/WMA file does not have tags or “TAG DISP” is
set to “TAG OFF,” folder name and file name appear.
2
Skipping a track quickly during play
• For MP3/WMA disc, you can skip a track within the
same folder.
Programme A broadcasting on different frequency
areas (01 – 05)
Prohibiting disc ejection
You can lock a disc in the loading slot.
Example: Select track 32
PTY Standby Reception
PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch
temporarily to your favourite PTY programme from any
source other than AM.
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
To activate and select your favourite PTY code for
PTY Standby Reception, see “General settings—PSM.”
• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is
not yet activated.
To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to
another station providing these signals.
External component operations
Automatic station selection —
Programme Search
You can connect an external component to the AUX (auxiliary) input
jack on the control panel.
Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset
station is tuned in.
If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not
sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF data,
tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the same
programme as the original preset station is broadcasting.
PTY codes
Turn on the connected
component and start
playing the source.
NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,
SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY
M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),
WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),
OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT
Stereo mini plug
(not supplied)
Portable audio player,
etc.
2 – EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SETTINGS
TROUBLESHOOTING
Sound adjustments
BAS*1 (bass)
Adjust the bass.
TRE*1 (treble)
Adjust the treble.
FAD*2 (fader)
Adjust the front and rear speaker
balance.
–06 to +06
–06 to +06
R06 to F06
Symptoms
Remedies/Causes
• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
• This unit does not work at all.
Reset the unit.
• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.
• Static noise while listening to the radio.
• Disc cannot be played back.
Connect the aerial firmly.
Insert the disc correctly.
Preset values
Indication (For)
BAS TRE LOUD
BAL (balance)
Adjust the left and right speaker balance.
LOUD*1 (loudness)
Boost low and high frequencies to
produce a well-balanced sound at a low
volume level.
L06 to R06
USER (Flat sound)
00 00 OFF
+03 +01 ON
+01 –02 OFF
+04 +01 OFF
+02 00 ON
+02 +03 OFF
• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.
• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
skipped.
• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.
• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you used
for recording.
ROCK (Rock or disco music)
CLASSIC (Classical music)
POPS (Light music)
LOUD ON or
LOUD OFF
• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc.
• Eject the disc forcibly.
HIP HOP (Funk or rap music)
JAZZ (Jazz music)
VOL (volume)
Adjust the volume.
00 to 50
(or 00 to 30)*3
• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.
• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.
• Change the disc.
• Check the cords and connections.
BAS: Bass; TRE: Treble; LOUD: (loudness)
1
*
When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the
adjustment you have made is stored for the currently
selected sound mode (c-EQ) including “USER.”
If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader level
to “00.”
• “NO DISC” appears on the display.
• “PLEASE” and “EJECT” appear alternately
on the display.
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
Adjusting the sound
2
3
*
*
• Disc cannot be played back.
• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in a format compliant
with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.
Depending on the amplifier gain control setting.
• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to the file names.
• Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the extension
code <.mp3> or <.wma> to non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)
General settings—PSM
• A longer readout time is required
(“READING” keeps flashing on the display).
Do not use too many hierarchical levels and folders.
Enter PSM menu.
Select an item.
Adjust.
Finish.
• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.
have intended.
• The elapsed playing time is not correct.
This sometimes occurs during playback. This is caused by how the
tracks are recorded on the disc.
Indication
Item ( : Initial)
• DEMO ON
Setting
• The correct characters are not displayed
(e.g. album name).
This unit can only display alphabets (upper case), numbers, and a
limited number of symbols.
DEMO
:
The display demonstration will be activated automatically if no
operation is done for about 20 seconds.
Cancels.
• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
• DEMO OFF
• ON
:
:
CLK DISP*1
The clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is
turned off.
• OFF
:
Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about 5 seconds
when the power is turned off.
SPECIFICATIONS
CLOCK H (Hour)
CLOCK M (Minute)
24H/12H
0 – 23 (1 – 12)
00 – 59
:
:
:
[Initial: 0 (0:00)]
[Initial: 00 (0:00)]
See “Basic settings.”
CD player section
Audio amplifier section
Maximum Power Output:
Type:
Compact disc player
• 24H
• 12H
Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical pickup
(semiconductor laser)
Front/Rear:
50 W per channel
Continuous Power Output (RMS):
CLK ADJ*2
AF-REG*2
• AUTO
:
The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock time)
data in the RDS signal.
Cancels.
Number of channels:
Frequency Response:
Dynamic Range:
2 channels (stereo)
5 Hz to 20 000 Hz
93 dB
Front/Rear:
19 W per channel into 4 Ω,
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more
than 0.8% total harmonic
distortion.
• OFF
• AF
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit switches
to another station (the programme may differ from the one currently
received).
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Wow and Flutter:
98 dB
Less than measurable limit
Load Impedance:
Tone Control Range:
4
Ω
(4
Bass:
Treble:
Ω
to 8 allowance)
Ω
MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)
Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps
12 dB at 100 Hz
12 dB at 10 kHz
• The AF indicator lights up.
• AF REG
• OFF
:
:
When the currently received signals become weak, the unit switches to
another station broadcasting the same programme.
• The AF and REG indicators light up.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding Format:
Frequency Response:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
Other Terminal:
40 Hz to 20 000 Hz
70 dB
AUX (auxiliary) input jack
®
Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps
Cancels.
General
PTY-STBY*2
TA VOL*2
OFF,
PTY
codesActivates PTY
Standby
Reception
with
one
of
the
PTY
.
codes
Tuner section
Power Requirement:
Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V
(11 V to 16 V allowance)
Negative ground
Frequency Range:
FM1/2: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
VOL 00 – VOL 50 (or [Initial: VOL 15]
VOL 00 – VOL 30)*3
Grounding System:
Allowable Operating Temperature: 0°C to +40°C
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Installation Size (approx.):
182 mm × 52 mm × 160 mm
Panel Size (approx.):
FM3:
AM:
65.00 MHz to 74.00 MHz
MV: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz
LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz
P-SEARCH*2
DIMMER
TEL
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Activates Programme Search.
Cancels.
• ON
• OFF
:
:
Dims the display and button illumination.
Cancels.
[FM Tuner]
Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)
Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB
Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz
Stereo Separation: 30 dB
188 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm
Mass (approx.):
• MUTING 1/
MUTING 2
• OFF
:
Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular phone.
1.3 kg (excluding accessories)
:
Cancels.
SCROLL*4
• ONCE
• AUTO
• OFF
:
:
:
Scrolls the displayed information once.
Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).
Cancels.
• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display
regardless of the setting.
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
[MW Tuner]
Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB
[MW Tuner]
Sensitivity: 50 μV
AUX ADJ
A.ADJ 00
– A.ADJ 05
:
Adjust the auxiliary input level to avoid the sudden increase of the
output level when changing the source from external component
connected to the AUX input jack on the control panel.
TAG DISP
• TAG ON
• TAG OFF
:
:
Shows the tag while playing MP3/WMA tracks.
Cancels.
AMP GAIN
• LOW PWR
:
VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select if the maximum power of each speaker is less
than 50 W to prevent the speaker from being damaged.)
VOL 00 – VOL 50
• HIGH PWR
• AUTO
:
:
IF BAND
Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noise between
close stations. (The stereo effect may be lost.)
• WIDE
:
Subject to the interference noise from adjacent stations, but the sound
quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will remain.
1
*
If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended that you select “OFF” to
save the car’s battery.
Only for FM RDS stations.
Depends on the amplifier gain control.
Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.
2
3
4
*
*
*
3 – EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREPARATION
This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical
systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required,
which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealers.
INSTALLATION
The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information regarding installation
kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying kits.
• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.
In dash-mounting
WARNINGS
To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical
connections before installing the unit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.
Notes:
When you stand the unit, be careful not
to damage the fuse on the rear.
• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT
dealer.
• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front,
with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the
speakers from being damaged (see “General settings—PSM”).
Do the required electrical
connections.
• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.
• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this
unit.
Heat sink
Bend the appropriate tabs
to hold the sleeve firmly in
place.
Parts list for installation and connection
Removing the unit
Before removing the unit, release the rear section.
A/B
C
D
Control panel/
Hard case
Sleeve
Trim plate
G
E
F
Lock nut (M5)
Power cord
Washer (ø5)
J
I
H
Handles
Rubber cushion
Mounting bolt
(M4 × 5 mm ; M5 × 12.5 mm)
When using the optional stay
Stay (option)
Fire wall
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Dashboard
Typical connections
Screw (option)
Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this
unit. The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.
Install the unit at an angle of less
than 30˚.
1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.
2 Connect the aerial cord.
3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.
When installing the unit without using the sleeve
In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.
Note: If your vehicle does not have any accessory terminal, move the fuse from the fuse position 1 (initial position) to
fuse position 2, and connect the red lead (A7) to the positive (+) battery terminal.
• The yellow lead (A4) is not used in this case.
* Not supplied for this unit.
Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*
Bracket*
15 A fuse
Fuse position 2
Flat type screws (M5
× 8 mm)*
Fuse position 1
Aerial
terminal
Pocket
Bracket*
Rear ground terminal
PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections
Ignition switch
Black
To the metallic body or
chassis of the car
Connect only the front speakers if your
speaker system is two-speaker system.
To a live terminal in the
fuse block connecting to the
car battery (bypassing the
ignition switch) (constant
12 V)
White with black stripe
Yellow *2
Front speaker
(left)
White
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fuse block
Gray with black stripe
• The fuse blows.
Red
To an accessory terminal in
the fuse block
* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?
• Power cannot be turned on.
* Is the yellow lead connected?
Front speaker
(right)
Gray
• No sound from the speakers.
* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?
• Sound is distorted.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
• Noise interfere with sounds.
Blue with white
stripe
Green with black stripe
To the remote lead of other equipment or
power aerial if any (200 mA max.)
Rear speaker
(left)
Green
Brown
To cellular phone system
Purple with black stripe
* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?
• This unit becomes hot.
* Is the speaker output lead grounded?
* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?
1
*
*
Not supplied for this unit.
Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this
lead must be connected, otherwise the power cannot be turned on.
Rear speaker
(right)
Purple
2
• This unit does not work at all.
* Have you reset your unit?
4 – EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|